Bryant 548J User Manual

548J
SINGLE PACKAGE HEAT PUMP/ELECTRIC HEAT NOMINAL 3 TO 8.5 TONS WITH PURON
R
(R--410A) REFRIGERANT
Service and Maintenance Instructions
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PURON
COOLING CHARGING CHARTS 14................
CONVENIENCE OUTLETS 19....................
HEAT PUMP CONTROLS 20......................
PROTECTIVE CONTROLS 20.....................
COMMERCIAL DEFROST CONTROL 21...........
ELECTRIC HEATERS 24.........................
SMOKE DETECTORS 26.........................
RTU--MP CONTROL SYSTEM 33..................
ECONOMIZER SYSTEMS 47.....................
WIRING DIAGRAMS 56.........................
PRE--START-UP 58..............................
START-UP, GENERAL 58.........................
START-UP, RTU--MP CONTROL 59................
OPERATING SEQUENCE 62......................
FASTENER TORQUE VALUES 67.................
APPENDIX I. MODEL NUMBER SIGNIFICANCE 68...
APPENDIX II. PHYSICAL DATA 69................
APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE 71...........
R
(R--410A) REFRIGERANT 13.............
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Installation and servicing of air-conditioning equipment can be hazardous due to system pressure and electrical components. Only trained and qualifi ed service personnel should install, repair, or service air-conditioning equipment. Untrained personnel can perform the basic maintenance functions of replacing filters. Trained service personnel should perform all other operations.
When working on air-conditioning equipment, observe precautions in the literature, tags and labels attached to the unit, and other safety precautions that may apply. Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves. Use quenching cloth for unbrazing operations. Have fire extinguishers available for all brazing operations.
Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves. Use quenching cloth for brazing operations. Have fire extinguisher available. Read these instructions thoroughly and follow all warnings or cautions attached to the unit. Consult local building codes and National Electrical Code (NEC) for special requirements.
Recognize safety information. This is the safety--alert symbol instructions or manuals, be alert to the potential for personal injury.
Understand the signal words DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION. These words are used with the safety--alert symbol. DANGER identifies the most serious hazards which will result in severe personal injury or death. WARNING signifies a hazard which could result in personal injury or death. CAUTION is used to identify unsafe practices which may result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. NOTE is used to highlight suggestions which will result in enhanced installation, reliability, or operation.
. When you see this symbol on the unit and in
APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL INFORMATION 82....
APPENDIX V. WIRING DIAGRAM LIST 96.........
APPENDIX VI. MOTORMASTER SENSOR
LOCATIONS 97.................................
UNIT START-UP CHECKLIST 99..................
!
WARNING
!
WARNING
548J
ELECTRICAL OPERATION HAZARD
Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death.
Before performing service or maintenance operations on unit, turn off main power switch to unit. Electrical shock and rotating equipment could cause injury.
!
WARNING
ELECTRICAL OPERATION HAZARD
Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death.
Units with convenience out let circuits may use multiple disconnects. Check convenience outlet for power status before opening unit for service. Locate its disconnect switch, if appropriate, and open it. Tag--out this switch, if necessary.
!
WARNING
UNIT OPERATION AND SAFETY HAZARD
Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury, death and/or equipment damage.
Puron (R--410A) refrigerant systems operate at higher pressures than standard R--22 system s. Do not use R--22 service equipment or components on Puron refrigerant equipment.
PERSONAL INJURY AND ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARD
Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury or death. Relieve pressure and recover all refrigerant before system repair or final unit disposal. Wear safety glasses and gloves when handling refrigerants. Keep torches and other ignition sources away from refrigerants and oils.
!
CAUTION
CUT HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result in personal injury.
Sheet metal parts may have sharp edges or burrs. Use care and wear appropriate protective clothing, safety glasses and gloves when handling parts and servicing air conditioning units.
2
UNIT ARRANGEMENT AND ACCESS
Seasonal Maintenance
General
Fig. 1 and Fig. 2 show general unit arrangement and access locations.
CONTROL BOX
INDOOR BLOWER ACCESS
COMPRESSORS (D08-09 only)
C09190
Fig. 1 -- Typical Access Panel Location (Front)
FILTER ACCESS PANEL
These items should be checked at the beginning of each season (or more often if local conditions and usage patterns dictate):
Air Conditioning/Heat
Pump
S Outdoor fan motor mounting bolts tightness S Compressor mounting bolts S Outdoor fan blade positioning S Control box cleanliness and wiring condition S Wire terminal tightness S Refrigerant charge level S Indoor coil cleaning S Supply blower motor amperage
Electric
Heating
S Power wire connections S Fuses ready S Manual--reset limit switch is closed
Economizer or Outside Air
Damper
S Inlet filters condition S Check damper travel (economizer) S Check gear and dampers for debris and dirt
Air Filters and Scr
eens
548J
INDOOR COIL ACCESS PANEL
C08449
Fig. 2 -- Typical Access Panel Locations (Rear)
Routine Maintenance
These items should be part of a routine maintenance program, to be checked every month or two, until a specific schedule for each can be identified for this installation:
Quarterly Inspection (and 30 days after initial start
S Return air filter replacement S Outdoor hood inlet filters cleaned S Belt tension checked S Belt condition checked S Pulley alignment checked S Fan shaft bearing locking collar tightness chec ked S Outdoor coil cleanliness checked S Condensate drain checked
)
Each unit is equipped with return air filters. If the unit has an economizer, it will also have an outside air screen. If a manual outside air damper is added, an inlet air screen will also be present.
Each of these filters and screens will need to be periodically replaced or cleaned.
Return Air
Filters
Return air filters are disposable fiberglass media type. Access to the filters is through the small lift--out panel located on the rear side of the unit, above the evaporator/return air access panel. (See Fig. 1.)
To remove the filters:
1. Grasp the bottom flange of the upper panel.
2. Lift up and swing the bottom out until the panel dis­engages and pulls out.
3. Reach inside and extract the filters from the filter rack.
4. Replace these filters as required with similar replace­ment filters of same size.
To re--install the access panel:
1. Slide the top of the panel up under the unit top panel.
2. Slide the bottom into the side channels.
3. Push the bottom flange down until it contacts the top of the lower panel (or economizer top).
IMPORTANT: DO NOT OPERATE THE UNIT WITHOUT THESE FILTERS!
3
Outside Air Hood
Outside air hood inlet screens are permanent aluminum--mesh type filters. Check these for cleanliness. Remove the screens when cleaning is required. Clean by washing with hot low--pressure water and soft detergent and replace all screens before restarting the unit. Observe the flow direction arrows on the side of each filter frame.
Economizer Inlet Air Screen
This air screen is retained by spring clips under the top edge of the hood. (See Fig. 3.)
548J
BAROMETRIC RELIEF
DIVIDER
CLEANABLE ALUMINUM FILTER
OUTSIDE AIR
FILTER
HOOD
Fig. 3 -- Filter Installation
To remove the filter, open the spring clips. Re--install the filter by placing the frame in its track, then closing the spring clips.
FILTER CLIP
C08634
SUPPLY FAN (BLOWER) SECTION
!
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
Failure to follow this warning could cause persona l injury or death.
Before performing service or maintenance operations on the fan system, shut off all unit power and tag--out the unit disconnect switch. Do not reach into the fan section with power still applied to unit.
Supply Fan (Direct--Drive)
For unit sizes 04, 05 and 06, the Standard Static supply fan system consists of a direct--drive forward--curved centrifugal blower wheel attached to the motor shaft. The motor has taps to provide the servicer with the selection of one of five motor torque/speed ranges to best match wheel performance with attached duct system. See Fig. 5 (548J Direct--Drive Fan Assembly) and Fig. 6 (EMC Motor Connectors).
EMC Motor
95°
Motor Plug Position
(95° from vertical)
EMC Power Transformer (460, 575v)
Manual Outside Air Hood Screen
This inlet screen is secured by a retainer angle across the top edge of the hood. (See Fig. 4.)
C07156
Fig. 4 -- Screens Installed on Outdoor--Air Hood
(Sizes 08D--09D Shown)
To remove the screen, loosen the screws in the top retainer and slip the retainer up until the filter can be removed. Re--install by placing the frame in its track, rotating the retainer back down and tighten all screws.
Fig. 5 -- 548J Direct--Drive Supply Fan Assembly
L2
YEL
Gnd
GRN/YEL
L1
BLU
C
LGN
Com BRN
Speed
Taps
12345
VIO Default Connection
Fig. 6 -- EMC Motor Connectors
C09260
Motor Power Connections
C09261
4
460, 575-v Units
208/230-v Units
Fig. 7 -- EMC Unit Wiring
548J
C09263
ECM Motor – The direct--drive motor is an X13 Electronically Commutated motor (ECM). An ECM contains electronic circuitry to convert single--phase line AC voltage into a 3--phase DC voltage to power the motor circuit. The motor circuit is a DC brushless design with a permanent magnet rotor. On the X13 design, the electronic circuitry is integral to the motor assembly and cannot be serviced or replaced separately.
208/230--v units use a 230--v motor. 460--v units use a 230--v motor with a stepdown transformer (mounted on the end of the fan housing, see Fig. 5). 575--v units use a 460--v motor with an autotransformer. Motor power voltage is connected to motor terminals L and N (see Fig. 6 and Fig. 7); ground is connected at te rminal G. The motor power voltage is ALWAYS present; it is not switched off by a motor contactor.
Motor operation is initiated by the presence of a 24-- v control signal to one of the fi ve motor communications terminals. When the 24--v signal is removed, the motor will stop. The motor control signal is switched by the defrost board’s IFO output.
Evaluating motor speed – The X13 ECM is a constant torque motor design. The motor speed is adjusted by the motor control circuitry to maintain the programmed shaft torque. Consequently there is no specific speed value assigned to each control tap setting. At the Position 5 tap, the motor speed is approximately 1050 RPM (17.5 r/s) but it will vary depending on fan wheel loading.
Selecting speed tap – The five communications terminals are each programmed to provide a different motor torque output. See Table 1. Factory default tap selection is Position 1 for lowest torque/speed operation.
Table 1 – 548J Standard Static Motor Tap Programing
(percent of full--load torque)
Unit Size Ta p 1 Tap 2 Ta p 3 Ta p 4 Tap 5
04 32 38 45 50 100 05 46 58 61 69 100 06 73 82 85 90 100
Factory Default: Tap 1 (VIO)
To select another speed:
1. Disconnect main power to the unit.
2. Remove the motor signal lead (VIO) a t the motor communications terminal.
3. Reconnect the motor signal lead to the desired speed terminal.
4. Connect main power to the unit.
Motor “rocking” on start--up – When the motor first starts, the rotor (and attached wheel) will “rock” back and forth as the motor tests for rotational direction. Once the correct rotation direction is determined by the motor circuitry, the motor will ramp up to specified speed. The “rocking” is a normal operating characteristic of ECM motors.
Troubleshooting the ECM motor – Troubleshooting the X13 ECM requires a voltmeter.
1. Disconnect main power to the unit.
2. Remove the motor power plug (including the control BRN lead) and VIO control signal lead at the motor terminals.
3. Restore main unit power.
4. Check for proper line vol tage at motor power leads BLK (from L terminal) and YEL (from N terminal).
5
Table 2 – Motor Test Volts
Unit Voltage Motor Voltage Min ---Max Volts
208/230 230 190---250
460 230 210---250 575 460 420---500
5. Apply a jumper at uni t control terminals R to G to initiate a demand for motor operation. Check for 24--v output at defrost board terminal IFO.
6. Check for proper control signal voltage at motor signal leads VIO and BRN. Signal should be 22 to 28--v.
7. Disconnect unit main power.
8. Reconnect motor power and control signal leads at the motor terminals.
9. Restore unit main power.
Motor should start and run. If it does not, remove the
548J
motor assembly. Replace with same motor part number; do not substitute with an alternate design as torque/speed programming will not be same as on original factory motor.
Replacing the ECM Motor – Before removing the ECM belly--band mounting ring, measure the distance between the base of the motor shaft and the edge of the mounting ring. Remove the motor mounting band and transfer to the replacement motor. Position the mounting band at distance measured in first step. Snug the mounting bolt but do not tighten yet.
Insert the motor shaft into the fan wheel hub. Then secure the three motor mount arms to the support cushions. Torque the arm mounting screws to 60 in--lbs (6.8 N--m).
Center the fan wheel in the fan housing. Torque the fan wheel hub setscrew to 120 in -- lbs (13.6 N--m).
Ensure the motor terminals are located at a position below the 3 o’clock position (see Fig. 5). Tighten the motor belly--band bolt to 80 in--lbs (9.0 N--m).
Supply Fan (Belt--Drive)
The belt--drive supply fan system consists of a forward--curved centrifugal blower wheel on a solid shaft with two concentric type bearings, one on each side of the blower housing. A fixed--pitch driven pulley is attached to the fan shaft and an adjustable--pitch driver pulley is on the motor. The pulleys are connected using a “V” type belt. (See Fig. 8.)
C07087
Fig. 8 -- Belt Drive Motor Mounting
Belt
Check the belt condition and tension quarterly. Inspect the belt for signs of cracking, fraying or glazing along the inside surfaces. Check belt tension by using a spring--force tool (such as Browning’s Part Number “Belt Tension Checker” or equivalent tool); tension should be 6--lbs at a
5
/8--in. deflection when measured at the centerline of the belt span. This point is at the center of the belt when measuring the distance between the motor shaft and the blower shaft.
NOTE: Without the spring--tension tool, place a straight edge across the belt surface at the pulleys, then deflect the
1
belt at mid--span using one finger to a
/2--in. deflection.
Adjust belt tension by loosening the motor mounting plate front bolts and rear bolt and sliding the plate toward the fan (to reduce tension) or away from fan (to increase tension). Ensure the blower shaft and the motor shaft are parallel to each other (pulleys aligned). Tighten all bolts when finished.
To replace the belt:
1. Use a belt with same section type or similar size. Do not substitute a “FHP” type belt. When installing the new belt, do not use a tool (screwdriver or pry--bar) to force the be lt over the pulley flanges, this will stress the belt and cause a reduction in belt life.
2. Loosen the motor mounting plate front bolts and rear bolts.
3. Push the motor and its mounting plate towards the blower housing as close as possible to reduce the cen­ter distance between fan shaft and motor shaft.
4. Remove the belt by gently lifting the old belt over one of the pulleys.
5. Install the new belt by gentl y sliding the belt over both pulleys and then sliding the motor and plate away from the fan housing until proper tension is achieved.
6. Check the alignment of the pulleys, adjust if necessary.
7. Tighten all bolts.
8. Check the tension after a few hours of runtime and re--adjust as required.
6
Adjustable--Pitch Pulley on Motor
The motor pull ey is an adjustable--pitch type that allows a servicer to implement changes in the fan wheel speed to match as--installed ductwork systems. The pulley consists of a fixed flange side that faces the motor (secured to the motor shaft) and a movable flange side that can be rotated around the fixe d flange side that increases or reduces the pitch diameter of this driver pulley. (See Fig. 9.)
4. Recheck belt tension.
Bearings
This fan system uses bearings featuring concentric split locking collars. The collars are tightened through a cap screw bridging the split portion of the collar. The cap screw has a Torx T25 socket head. To tighten the locking collar: Hold the locking collar tightly against the inner race of the bearing and torque the cap screw to 65--70 in--lb (7.4--7.9 Nm). See Fig. 10.
548J
C07075
Fig. 9 -- Supply--Fan Pulley Adjustment
As the pitch diameter is c hanged by adjusting the position of the movable flange, the centerline on this pul ley shifts laterally (along the motor shaft). This creates a requirement for a realignment of the pulleys aft er any adjustment of the movable flange. Also reset the belt tension after each realignment.
Check the condition of the motor pulley for signs of wear. Glazing of the belt contact surfaces and e rosion on these surfaces are signs of improper belt tension and/or belt slippage. Pulley replacement may be necessary.
To change fan speed:
1. Shut off unit power supply.
2. Loosen belt by loosening fan motor mounting nuts. (See Fig. 8.)
3. Loosen movable pulley flange setscrew. (See Fig. 9.)
4. Screw movable flange toward fixed flange t o increase speed and away from fixed flange to decrease speed. Increasing fan speed increases load on motor. Do not exceed maximum speed specified.
5. Set movable fla nge at nearest keyway of pulley hub and tighten setscrew to torque specifications.
To align fan and motor pulleys:
1. Loosen fan pulley setscrews.
2. Slide fan pulley along fan shaft. Make angular align­ment by loosening motor from mounting.
3. Tighten fan pulley setscrews and motor mounting bolts to torque specifications.
C08121
Fig. 10 -- Tightening Locking Collar
Motor
When replacing the motor, also re place the external--tooth lock washer (star washer) under the motor mounting base; this is part of the motor grounding system. Ensure the teeth on the lock washer are in contact with the motor’s painted base. Tighten motor mounting bolts to 120 +/-- 12 in--lbs.
Changing fan wheel speed by changing pulleys: The horsepower rating of the belt is primarily dictated by the pitch diameter of the smaller pulley in the drive system (typically the motor pulley in these units). Do not install a replacement motor pulley with a smaller pitch diameter than provided on the original factory pulley. Change fan wheel speed by changing the fan pulley (larger pitch diameter to reduce wheel speed, smaller pitch diameter to increase wheel speed) or select a new system (both pulleys and matching belt(s)).
Before changing pulleys to increase fan wheel speed, check the fan performance at the target speed and airflow rate to determine new motor loading (bhp). Use the fan performance tables or use the Packaged Rooftop Builder software program. Confirm that the motor in this unit is capable of operating at the new operating condition. Fan shaft loading increases dramatically as wheel speed is increased.
To reduce vibration, replace the motor’s adjustable pitch pulley with a fixed pitch pulley (after the final airflow balance adjustment). This will re duce the amount of vibration generated by the motor/belt--drive system.
7
HEAT PUMP REFRIGERATION
SYSTEM
!
WARNING
UNIT OPERATION AND SAFETY HAZARD
Failure to follow this warning could cause persona l injury, death and/or equipment damage.
This system uses Puron higher pressures than R--22 and ot her refrigera nts. No other refrigerant may be used in this system. Gauge set, hoses, and recovery system must be designed to handle Puron refrigerant. If unsure about equipm ent, consult the equipm ent manufacturer.
R
refrigerant which has
NOTE: Use of a water stream, such as a garden hose, against a surface loaded coil will drive the fibers and dirt into the coil. This will make cleaning efforts more difficult. Surface loaded fibers must be completely removed prior to using low velocity clean water rinse.
Periodic Clean Water
A periodic clean water rinse is very beneficial for coils that are appli ed in coastal or industrial environments. However, it is very important that the water rinse is made with very low velocity water stream to avoid damaging the fin edges. Monthly cleaning as described below is recommended.
!
Rinse
CAUTION
Outdoor Coil
548J
The 548J outdoor coil is fabricated with round tube copper hairpins and plate fins of various materials and/or coatings (see “Appendi x I -- Model Number Significance” to identify the materials provided in this unit). All unit sizes use composite--type two--row coils. Composite two--row coils are two single--row coils fabricated with a single return bend end tubesheet.
Indoor Coil
The indoor coil is traditional round--tube, plate --fin technology. Tube and fin construction is of various optional materials and coatings (see Model Number Format). Coils are multiple--row.
Outdoor Coil Maintenance and Cleaning Recommendation
Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintain proper operation of the unit. Elimination of contamination and removal of harmful residues will greatly increase the life of the coil and extend the life of the unit. The following maintenance and cleaning procedures are recommended as part of the routine maintenance activities to extend the life of the coil.
Remove Surface Loaded
Surface loaded fibers or dirt should be removed with a vacuum cleaner. If a vacuum cleaner is not available, a soft non--metallic bristle brush may be used. In either case, the tool should be applied in the direction of the fins. Coil surfaces can be easily damaged (fin edges can be easily bent over and damage the coating of a protected coil) if the tool is applied across the fins.
Fibers
PERSONAL INJURY AND UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
Only approved cleaning is recommended.
Routine Cleaning of Indoor Coil Surfaces
®
Periodic cleaning with Totaline coil cleaner is essential to e xtend the life of coils. This cleaner is available from our Replacement Components Division as part number P902--0301 for one gallon container, a nd part number P902--0305 for a 5 gallon container. It is recommended that all coils, including standard aluminum, pre--coated, copper/copper or E--coated coils be cleaned with the Totaline environmentally sound coil cleaner as described below. Coil cleaning should be part of the unit’s regularly scheduled maintenance procedures to ensure long life of the coil. Failure to clean the coils may result in reduced durability in the environment.
Avoid the use of
S coil brighteners S acid cleaning prior to painting S high pressure washers S poor quality water for cleaning
Totaline environmenta lly sound coil cleaner is nonflammable, hypoallergenic, non bacterial, and a USDA accepted biodegradable agent that will not harm the coil or surrounding components such as electrical wiring, painted metal surfaces, or insulation. Use of non--recommended coil cleaners is strongly discouraged since coil and unit durability could be affected.
environmentally sound
Clean coil as follows:
1. Turn off unit power, tag disconnect.
2. Remove top panel screws on outdoor coil end of unit.
3. Remove coil corner post. See Fig. 11. To hold top panel open, place coil corner post between top panel and center post. See Fig. 12.
8
OUTDOOR COIL
C09219
Fig. 11 -- Cleaning Condenser Coil (Size 04--07 shown)
7. Secure inner a nd outer coil rows together with a field--supplied fastener.
8. Reposition the outer coil section and remove the coil corner post from between the top panel and center post. Reinstall the coil corner post and replace all screws.
Totaline Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner Application Equipment
1
/2gallon garden sprayer
S 2 S Water rinse with low velocity spray nozzle
!
CAUTION
UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result in corrosion and damage to the unit.
Harsh chemicals, household bleach or acid or basic cleaners should not be used to clean outdoor or indoor coils of any kind. These cleaners can be very difficult to rinse out of the coil and can accelerate corrosion at the fin/tube interface where dissimilar materials are in contact. If there is dirt below the surface of the coil, use the Totali ne environmentally sound coil cleaner as described above.
548J
C08206
Fig. 12 -- Propping Up Top Panel
4. For Sizes 04--07: Remove screws securing coil to compressor plate and compressor access panel.
5. For Sizes 08--09: Remove fastener holding coil sec­tions together at return end of condenser coil. Ca re­fully separate the outdoor coil section 3 to 4 in. from the inner coil section. See Fig. 13.
OUTDOOR COIL
C09220
Fig. 13 -- Separating Coil Sections
6. Use a water hose or other suitable equipment to flush down between the 2 coil sections to remove dirt and debris. Clean the outer surfaces with a stiff brush in the normal manner.
!
CAUTION
UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result in reduced unit performance.
High velocity water from a pressure washer, garden hose, or compressed air should never be used to clean a coil. The force of the water or air jet will bend the fin edges and increase airside pressure drop.
Totaline Environmentally Sound Coil Cleaner Application Instructions
1. Proper eye protection such as safety glasses is recom­mended during mixing and application.
2. Remove all surface loaded fibers and dirt with a vacu­um cleaner as described above.
3. Thoroughly wet finned surfaces with clean water and a low velocity garden hose, being carefull not to bend fins.
4. Mix Totaline environmentally sound coil cleaner in a
1
/2gallon garden spryer according to the instruc-
2 tions included with the cleaner. The optimum solution temperature is 100°F(38°C).
NOTE: Do NOT USE water in excess of 130°F(54°C), as the enzymatic activity will be destroyed.
5. Thoroughly apply Totaline environmentally sound coil cleaner solution to all coil surfaces including finned area, tube sheets and coil headers.
6. Hold garden sprayer nozzle close to finned areas and apply cleaner with a vertical, up--and--down motion.
9
Avoid spraying in horizontal pattern to minimize poten­tial for fin damage.
7. Ensure cleaner thoroughly penetrates deep into finned areas.
8. Interior and e xterior finned areas must be thoroughly cleaned.
9. Finned surfaces should remain wet with cleaning solution for 10 minutes.
10. Ensure surfaces are not allowed to dry before rinsing. Reapply cleaner as needed to ensure 10--minute satur­ation is achieved.
11. Thoroghly rinse all surfaces with low velocity clean water using downward rinsing motion of water spray nozzle. Protect fins from damage from the spray nozzle.
Indoor Coil
Cleaning the Indoor Coil
548J
1. Turn unit power off. Install lockout tag. Remove in­door coil access panel.
2. If economizer or two--position damper is installed, re­move economizer by disconnecting Molex plug and removing mounting screws.
3. Slide filters out of unit.
4. Clean coil using a commercial coil cleaner or dish­washer detergent in a pressurized spray canister. Wash both sides of coil and flush with clean water. For best results, back--flush toward return--air section to re­move foreign material. Flush condensate pan after completion.
Filter Drier
LPS/LOC
2B
5. Reinstall economizer and filters.
6. Reconnect wiring.
7. Replace access panels.
Refrigeration System
Components
Each heat pump refrigeration system includes a compressor, accumulator, reversing valve, dual--function outdoor coil with vapor header check valve, cooling liquid line with filter drier and check valve, dual--function indoor coil with vapor header check valve, and heating liquid line with check valve and strainer. Unit sizes 04A--07A have a single compressor--circuit; unit sizes 08D and 09D have two compressor--circuits. See Fig. 14 for typical unit piping schematic (unit size 09D (4--row indoor coil) with two compressor--circuits is depicted).
Dual--function outdoor and indoor coils are designed to provide parallel coil circuits during evaporator--function operation and converging coil circuits during condenser--function operation.
Refrigerant flow metering in the evaporator--function sequence is provided by multiple Acutrols – fixed--bore metering devices that are located in the tee nipples between the liquid header and the entrance to each coil circuit. The Acutrol metering device is swaged into the nipple tube between the liquid header end and the side--port tube. See Fig. 15. During evaporator--function operation, flow is straight through the nipple and into each evaporator circuit. Flow continues through the parallel evaporator circuits and into the vapor heade r.
DFT 2
Acutrol
DFT 1
Outdoor Coil
1B
1A
ACCUMULATOR
2A
Heating Mode Liquid Lines
Cooling Liquid Lines
HPS
COMPRESSOR
Comp 2
ACCUMULATOR
COMPRESSOR
2C
HPS
Comp 1
2D
1D
Indoor Coil
1C
Strainer
Fig. 14 -- Typical Unit Piping Schematic (09D unit with 4--row indoor coil)
Acutrol
C09228
10
To
r
r
Evaporato Coil Circuits
Metering Orifice
From Liquid Header
C09229
Fig. 15 -- Heat Pump Acutrol — Flow as Evaporator
Function
Converging circuit flow in the condenser--function operation is accomplished with the check valve in the vapor header and the liquid transfer header connected to the side ports on all but one of the Acurator tee nipples in each circuit. During condenser --function operation, hot gas from the compressor discharge enters the header until it reaches the check valve which blocks further flow. The hot gas exits the header through the tubes above the check valve and enters these coil circuits. At the outlet of these desuperheating and condensing circuits, the refrigerant enters the Acurater tees from the coil end. The refrigerant exits the tee at the side port and enters the liquid transfer header (see Fig. 16). The refrigerant moves through the liquid transfer header and exits through the remai ning tubes, through the side ports on the Acutrol tees (see Fig. 17) and back into the coil circuits where additional condensing occurs. These circuits exit into the vapor header behind the check valve and exit through the remaining tube on the vapor header. In this last pass through the coil, the refrigerant is subcooled. Subcooled liquid exits at the last Acutrol tee (see Fig. 18) where the side port is connected to the specific mode liquid line.
From Condenser Coil Circuits
To Condensing Circuit
From Transfer Header
C09231
Fig. 17 -- Heat Pump Acutrol — Flow as Condenser
Function/Entering Second Pass
DFT Location (Outdoor Coils only)
From Subcoole Circuit
To Liquid Line
C09232
Fig. 18 -- Heat Pump Acutrol — Flow as Condenser
Function/ Exiting Subcooler Pass
Each liquid line has a check valve to prevent backflow through the liquid line in its opposite mode. Thi s ensures correct flow direction through filter driers and strainers and prevents emptying of off-- mode liquid lines into evaporator--function coil circuits.
Reversing Valve and Check Valve Position
SeeFig.14onpage10.
Table 3 – Cooling Mode (each circuit)
548J
To Transfer Header
Fig. 16 -- Heat Pump Acutrol — Flow as Condenser
Function/ Exiting First Pass
C09230
Component Status/Position
Reversing Valve Energized
Check Valve A Closed
Check Valve B Open
Check Valve C Closed
Check Valve D Open
Table 4 – Heating Mode (each circuit)
Component Status/Position
Reversing Valve De--- energized
Check Valve A Open
Check Valve B Closed
Check Valve C Open
Check Valve D Closed
11
Table 5 – Defrost Mode
04A---07A and 08D---09D/Circuit 2:
Component
Defrost Thermostat Closed
Outdoor Fan(s) Off
Reversing Valve Energized
Check Valve A Closed
Check Valve B Open
Check Valve C Closed
Check Valve D Open
Status/Position
Troubleshooting Refrigerant Pressure Problems and Check Valves
Refer to Fig. 14, on page 10, and t he Cooling Mode and Heating Mode tables (Tables 3 and 4) on page 11.
548J
Coil Metering
The metering devices are multiple fixed–bore devices (Acutrolt) swaged into the horizontal outlet tubes from the liquid header, located at the entrance to each evaporator coil circuit path. These are non–adjustable. Service requires replacing the entire liquid header assembly.
Check for possible blockage of one or more of these metering devices by creating a low load condition on the evaporator--function coil and then observing the frosting pattern on the finned portion of the coil.
To c heck the indoor coil, disconnect the supply fan signal (04A--06A direct--drive fans) or contactor (IFC) coil, then
Devices
start the circuit in a Cooling Mode (jumper R to Y1 or Y2) and observe the frosting pattern on the face of the indoor coil. A frost pattern should develop uniformly across the face of the indoor coil starting a t each tube at the Acutrol nipple locations.
To check the outdoor coil, disconnect the outdoor fan motor. Start the circuit in a Heating Mode (jumper R to W1 or W2) and observe the frost pattern on the face of the outdoor coil.
Failure to develop frost at an outlet tube can indicate a plugged or a missing orifice.
Refrigerant System Pressure Access Ports
There are two access ports in each circuit -- on the suction tube near the compressor and on the discharge tube near the compressor. These are brass fittings with black plastic caps. The hose connection fittings are standard 1/4 SAE Male Flare couplings.
The brass fittings are two--piece High Flow valves, with a receptacle base brazed to the tubing and an integral spring-- closed check valve core screwed into the base. (See Fig. 19.) This check valve is permanently assembled into this core body a nd cannot be serviced separately; replace the entire core body if necessary. Service tools are available from RCD that allow the replacement of the check valve core without having to re cover the entire system refri gerant charge. Apply compressor refrigerant oil t o the check valve core’s bottom o--ring. Install the fitting body with 96 +/--10 in--lbs of torque; do not overtighten.
5/8” HEX
SEAT
.47
1/2-20 UNF RH
0.596
30°
WASHER
O-RING
This surface provides a metal to metal seal when torqued into the seat. Appropriate handling is required to not scratch or dent the surface.
Fig. 19 -- CoreMax Access Port Assembly
CORE
(Part No. EC39EZ067)
1/2" HEX
45°
DEPRESSOR PER ARI 720 +.01/-.035 FROM FACE OF BODY
7/16-20 UNF RH
C08453
12
PURONR(R--410A) REFRIGERANT
This unit is designed for use with Puron (R--410A) refrigerant. Do not use any other refrigerant in this system.
Puron (R --410A) refrigerant is provided in pink (rose) colored cylinders. These cylinders are available with and without dip tubes; cylinders with dip tubes will have a label indicating this feature. For a cylinder with a dip tube, place the cylinder in the upright position (access valve at the top) whe n removing liquid refrigerant for charging. For a cyli nder without a dip tube, invert the cylinder (access valve on the bottom) when removing liquid refrigerant.
Because Puron (R--410A) refrigerant is a blend, it is strongly recommended that refrigerant always be removed from the cylinder as a liquid. Admit liquid refrigerant into the system in the discharge line. If adding refrigerant into the suction line, use a commercial metering/expansion device at t he gauge manifold; remove liquid from the cylinder, pass it through the metering device at the gauge set and then pass it into the suction line as a vapor. Do not remove Puron (R--410A) refrigerant from the cylinder as a vapor.
To Use Cooling Charging
Charts
Take the outdoor ambient temperature and read t he suction pressure gauge. Refer to chart to determine what suction temperature should be. If suction temperature is high, add refrigerant. If suction temperature is low, carefully recover some of the charge. Recheck the suction pressure as charge is adjusted.
SIZE DESIGNATION
04A 3 05A 4 06A 5
07A 6 08D 7.5 09D 8.5
NOMINAL TONS
REFERENCE
EXAMPLE:
Model 548J*04A
Outdoor Temperature 85_F(29_C)..................
Suction Pressure 140 psig (965 kPa).................
Suction Temperature should be 55_F(13_C)..........
Compressors
548J
Refrigerant Charge
Amount of refrigerant charge is listed on the unit’s nameplate. Refer to the GTAC2--5 Charging, Recovery, Recycling and Reclamation training manual and the following procedures.
Unit panels m ust be in place when unit is operating during the charging procedure. If unit is equipped with a head pressure control device, bypass it to ensure full fan operation during charging.
Charge checking and adjustments must be made while the system is operating in Cooling only.
Charge
No
Use standard evacuation techniques for Puron (R--410A) refrigerant.. After evacuating system, weigh in the specified amount of refrigerant.
Low--Charge
Using Cooli ng Charging Charts, Fig. 20 vary refrigerant until the conditions of the appropriate chart are met. Note the charging charts are different from type normally used. Charts are based on charging the units to the correct superheat for the various operating conditions. Accurate pressure gauge and tempera ture sensing device are required. Connect the pressure gauge to the service port on the suction line. Mount the temperature sensing device on the suction line and insulate it so that outdoor ambient temperature does not affect the reading. Indoor--a ir cfm must be within the normal operating range of the unit.
Cooling
Lubrication
Compressors are charged with the correct amount of oil at the factory.
!
CAUTION
UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result in damage to components.
The compressor is in a PuronR refrigerant system and uses a polyolester (POE) oil. This oil is extremely hygroscopic, meaning it absorbs water readily. POE oils can absorb 15 times as much water as other oils designed for HCFC and CFC refrigerants. Avoid exposure of the oil to the atmosphere.
Replacing Compressor
The compressor used with Puron refrigerant contains a POE oil. This oil has a high affinity for moisture. Do not remove the compressor’s tube plugs until ready to insert the unit suction and discharge tube ends.
Compressor mounting bolt torque is 65--75 in--lbs (7.3--8.5 Nm).
13
548J
COOLING CHARGING CHARTS
Fig. 20 -- Cooling Charging Charts-- 548J*04A
C09184
Fig. 20 (cont.) -- Cooling Charging Charts -- 548J*05A
14
C09185
Fig. 20 (cont.) -- Cooling Charging Charts -- 548J*06A
548J
C09186
Fig. 20 (cont.) -- Cooling Charging Charts -- 548J*07A
15
C09187
548J
C09188
Fig. 20 (cont.) -- Cooling Charging Charts -- 548J*08D
Fig. 20 (cont.) -- Cooling Charging Charts -- 548J*09D
16
C09189
Compressor Rotation
Filter Drier
!
CAUTION
PERSONAL INJURY HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result in personal injury.
On 3--phase units with scroll compressors, it is important to be certain compressor is rotating in the proper direction. To determine whether or not compressor is rotating in the proper direction:
1. Connect service gauges to suction and discharge pres­sure fittings.
2. Energize the compressor.
3. The suction pressure should drop and the discharge pressure should rise, as is normal on any start--up.
NOTE: If the suction pressure does not drop and the discharge pressure doe s not rise to normal levels:
4. Note that the evaporator fan is probably also rotating in the wrong direction.
5. Turn off power to the unit.
6. Reverse any two of the unit power leads.
7. Reapply power to the compressor.
The suction and discharge pressure levels should now move to their normal start--up levels.
NOTE: When the compressor is rotating in the wrong direction, the unit makes an elevated level of noise and does not provide cooling.
Replace whenever refrigerant system is exposed to atmosphere. Only use factory specified liquid--line filter driers with working pressures no less than 650 psig. Do not install a suction--line filter drier in liquid line. A liquid--line filter drier designed for use with Puron refrigerant is required on every unit.
Outdoor Fan Location
See Fig. 21.
1. Shut off unit power supply. Install lockout tag.
2. Remove condenser --fan assembly (grille, motor, and fan).
3. Loosen fan hub setscrews.
4. Adjust fan height as shown in Fig. 21.
5. Tighten setscrews to 84 in--lbs (9.5 Nm).
6. Replace condenser--fan assembly.
Conduit
0.14 in + 0.0 / -0.03
C08448
Fig. 21 -- Outdoor Fan Adjustment
Troubleshooting Cooling System
Refer to Table 6 for additional troubleshooting topics.
548J
17
PROBLEM CAUSE REMEDY
Compressor an d Outdoor Fan Will Not Start.
Compressor Will Not Start But Outdoor Fan Runs.
548J
Compressor Cycles (Other Than Normally Satisfying Thermostat).
Compressor Operates Continuously.
Compressor Makes Excessive Noise.
Excessive Head Pressure.
Head Pressure Too L ow.
Excessive Suction Pressure.
Suction Pressure Too L ow.
Tabl e 6 – Heating and Cooling Troubleshooting
Power failure. Call power company.
Fuse blown or circuit breaker tripped. Replace fuse or reset circuit breaker. Determine root cause.
Defective thermostat, contactor, transformer, control relay, or capacitor.
Insufficient line voltage. Determine cause and correct.
Incorrect or faulty wiring. Check wiring diagram and rewire correctly.
Thermostat setting too high. Lower thermostat setting below room temperature.
High pressure switch tripped. See problem ‘‘Excessive head pressure.’’
Low pressure switch tripped. Check system for leaks. Repair as necessary.
Freeze-up protection thermostat tripped. See problem ‘‘Suction pressure too low.’’
Fault y wiring or loose connections in compressor circuit.
Compressor motor burned out, seized, or internal overload open.
Defective run/start capacitor, overload, start relay.
Onelegof3-phasepowerdead. Replace fuse or reset circuit breaker. Determine cause.
Refrigerant overcharge or undercharge. Recover refrigerant, evacuate system, and recharge to nameplate.
Defective compressor. Replace and determine cause.
Insufficient line voltage. Determine cause and correct.
Blocked outdoor coil or dirty air filter. Determine cause and correct.
Defective run/start capacitor, overload, or start relay.
Defective thermostat. Replace thermostat.
Faulty outdoor-fan (cooling) or indoor-fan (heating) motor or capacitor.
Restriction in refrigerant system. Locate restriction and remove.
Dirty air filter. Replace filter.
Unit undersized for load. Decrease load or increase unit size.
Thermostat set too low (cooling). Reset thermostat.
Low refrigerant charge. Locate leak; repair and recharge.
Air in system. Recover refrigerant, evacuate system, and recharge.
Outdoor coil dirty or restricted. Clean coil or remove restriction.
Compressor rotating in the wrong direction. Reverse the 3-phase power leads as described in
Dirty outside air or return air filter (heating). Replace filter.
Dirty outdoor coil (cooling). Clean coil.
Refrigerant overcharged. Recover excess refrigerant.
Air in system. Recover refrigerant, evacuate system, and recharge.
Condensing air restricted or air short-cycling. Determine cause and correct.
Low refrigerant charge. Check for leaks; repair and recharge.
Compressor scroll plates defective. Replace compressor.
Restrictioninliquidtube. Remove restriction.
High heat load. Check for source and eliminate.
Compressor scroll plates defective. Replace compressor.
Refrigerant overcharged. Recover excess refrigerant.
Dirty air filter (cooling). Replace filter.
Dirty or heavily iced outdoor coil (heating). Clean outdoor coil. Check defrost cycle operation.
Low refrigerant charge. Check for leaks; repair and recharge.
Metering device or low side restricted. Remove source of restriction.
Insufficient indoor airflow (cooling mode). Increase air quantity. Check filter and replace if necessary.
Temperature too low in conditioned area. Reset thermostat.
Field-installed filter drier restricted. Replace.
Outdoor ambient below 25_F (cooling). Install low-ambient kit.
Outdoor fan motor(s) not operating (heating). Check fan motor operation.
Replace component.
Check wiring and repair or replace.
Determine cause. Replace compressor or allow enough time for internal overload to cool and reset.
Determine cause and replace compressor.
Determine cause and replace.
Replace.
Start-Up.
18
CONVENIENCE OUTLETS
!
WARNING
Mount the weatherproof cover to the backing plate as shown in Fig. 23. Remove two slot fillers in the bottom of the cover to permit servi ce tool cords to exit the cover. Check for full closing and latching.
ELECTRICAL OPERATION HAZARD
Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death.
Units with convenience out let circuits may use multiple disconnects. Check convenience outlet for power status before opening unit for service. Locate its disconnect switch, if appropriate, and open it. Tag--out this switch, if necessary.
Tw o types of convenience outlets are offered on 548J models: Non--powered and unit--powered. Both types provide a 125--volt GFCI (ground--fault circuit--interrupter) duplex receptacle rated at 15--A behind a hinged waterproof access cover, located on the end panel of the unit. See Fig. 22.
Pwd-CO
Convenience
Outlet
GFCI
Pwd-CO
Fuse
Switch
Transformer
COVER – WHILE-IN-USE WEATHERPROOF
RECEPTACLE NOT INCLUDED
BASE PLATE FOR GFCI RECEPTACLE
C09022
Fig. 23 -- Weatherproof Cover Installation
Non--powered type: This type requires the field
installation of a general--purpose 125--volt 15--A circuit powered from a source elsewhere in the building. Observe national and local codes when selecting wire size, fuse or breaker requirements and disconnect switch size and location. Route 125--v power supply conductors into the bottom of the utility box containing the duplex receptacle.
548J
Control Box
Access Panel
C08128
Fig. 22 -- Convenience Outlet Location
Installing Weatherproof Cover –
A weatherproof while-in-use cover for the factory-installed convenience outlets is now required by UL standards. This cover cannot be factory-mounted due its depth; it must be installed at unit installation. For shipment, the convenience outlet is covere d with a blank cover plate.
The weatherproof cover kit is shipped in the unit’s control box. The kit includes the hinged cover, a backing plate and gasket.
DISCONNECT ALL POWER TO UNIT AND CONVENIENCE OUTLET.
Remove the blank cover plate at the conveni ence out let; discard the blank cover.
Loosen the two screws at the GFCI duplex outlet, until
1
approximately
/2-in (13 mm) under screw heads are exposed. Press the gasket over the screw heads. Slip the backing plate over the screw heads at the keyhole slots and align with the gasket; tighten the two screws until snug (do not over-tighten).
Unit--powered type: A unit--mounted transformer is factory--installed to stepdown the main power supply voltage to the unit to 115--v at the duplex receptacle. This option also includes a manual switch with fuse, located in a utility box and mounted on a bracket behind the convenience outlet; access is through the unit’s control box access panel. See Fig. 22.
The primary leads to the convenience outlet transformer are not factory--connected. Selection of primary power source is a customer--option. If local codes permit, the transformer primary leads can be connected at the line--side terminals on the unit--mounted non--fused disconnect or HACR breaker switch; this will provide service power to the unit when t he unit disconnect switch or HACR switch is open. Other connection methods will result in the convenience outlet circuit being de--energized when the unit disconnect or HACR switch is open. See Fig. 24.
Duty Cycle: the unit--powered convenience outlet has a duty cycle limitation. The transformer is intended to provide power on an intermittent basis for service tools, lamps, etc; it is not intended to provide 15--amps loading for continuous duty loads (such as electric heaters for overnight use). Observe a 50% limit on circuit loading above 8--amps (i.e., limit loads exceeding 8--amps to 30 minutes of operation every hour).
Test the GFCI receptacle by pressing the TEST button on the face of the receptacle to trip and open the receptacle. Check for proper grounding wires a nd power line phasing
19
if the GFCI receptacle does not trip as required. Press the RESET button to clear the tripped condit ion.
548J
UNIT
VOLTAGE
208,
230
460 480
575 600
CONNECT
AS
240
PRIMARY
CONNECTIONS
L1: RED +YEL L2: BLU + GRA
L1: RED Splice BLU + YEL L2: GRA
L1: RED L2: GRA
TRANSFORMER
TERMINALS
H1 + H3 H2 + H4
H2 + H3
Terminals are clearly marked on the board surface. See Fig 25.
The CTB contains no software and no logic. But it does include seven configuration jumpers that are cut to configure the board to read external optional and accessory controls, including that the unit is a heat pump.
CO8283
H1
H4
H1 H2
Fig. 24 -- Powered Convenience Outlet Wiring
Maintenance: Periodically test the GFCI receptacle by pressing the TEST button on the face of the receptacle. This should cause the internal circuit of the receptacle to trip and open the receptacle. Check for proper grounding wires and power line phasing if the GFCI receptacle does not trip as required. Press the RESET button to clear the tripped condition.
Fuse on powered type: The factory fuse is a Bussman “Fusetron” T--15, non--renewable screw--in (Edison base) type plug fuse.
Using unit--mounted convenience outlets: Units with unit--mounted convenience outlet circuits will often require that two disconnects be opened to de--energize all power to the unit. Treat all units as electrically energized until the convenience outlet power is al so checked and de--energization is confirmed. Observe National Electrical Code Article 210, Branch Circuits, for use of convenience outlets.
HEAT PUMP CONTROLS
Controls Terminal Board
The Controls Terminal Board (CTB) is a large printed circuit board that is located in the center of the unit control box. This printed circuit board contains multiple termination strips and connectors to simplify factory control box wiring and field control connections.
C09274
Fig. 25 -- Controls Terminal Board (CTB)
Table 7 – Jumper Configuration
Jumper Control Function Note
JMP1 Phase Monitor JMP2 Occupancy Control JMP3 Smoke Detector Shutdown JMP4 Remote Shutdown JMP5 Heat Pump / Reheat 548J default: Cut JMP6 Heat Pump / Reheat 548J default: Cut JMP7 Heat Pump / Reheat 548J default: Cut
Jumpers JMP5, JMP6 and JMP7 are located in notches across the top of the CTB (see Fig. 25 ). These jumpers are factory cut on all heat pump units. Visually check these jumpers to confirm that they have been cut.
PROTECTIVE CONTROLS
Compressor Protection
Overcurrent
The compressor has internal linebreak motor protection.
20
Overtemperature
The compressor has an internal protec tor to protect it against excessively high discharge gas temperatures.
High Pressure
Switch
The system is provided with a high pressure switch mounted on the discharge line. The switch is stem--mounted and brazed into the discharge tube. Trip setting is 630 psig +/-- 10 psig (4344 +/-- 69 kPa) when hot. Reset is automatic at 505 psig (3482 kPa).
Loss of Charge
Switch
The system is protected against a loss of charge and low evaporator coil loading condition by a loss of charge switch located on the liquid line and a freeze protection thermostat on the indoor coil . The switch is stem--mounted. Loss of Charge Switch trip setting is 27 psig +/-- 3 psig (186 +/-- 21 kPa). Re set is automatic at 44 +/-- 3 psig (303 +/-- 21 kPa).
Freeze Protection Thermostat trip setting is 30_F+/--5_F (-- 1_C+/--3_C). Reset is automatic at 45_F+/--5_F(7_C +/--3_C).
Supply (Indoor) Fan Motor Protection
Disconnect and lockout power when servicing fan motor.
2.9 and 3.7 bhp motors are equipped with an overtemperature or protection device. The type of devi ce depends on the motor size. See Table 8.
Table 8 – Overload Device per Motor Size
Motor Size (bhp) Overload Device Reset
1.7 Internal Linebreak Automatic
2.4 Internal Linebreak Automatic
2.9 Thermix Automatic
3.7 Thermix Automatic
4.7
External
(Circuit Breaker)
Manual
Troubleshooting supply fan m otor overload trips: The supply fan used in 548J units is a forward--c urved centrifugal wheel. At a constant wheel speed, this wheel had a characteristic that causes the fan shaft load to DECREASE when the static pressure in the unit--duct system increases and to INCREASE when the static pressure in the unit--duct system decreases (and fan airflow rate increases). Motor overload conditions typically develop when the unit is operated with an access panel removed, with unfinished duct work, in an economizer--open mode, or a leak de velops in the duct system that allows a bypass back to unit return opening.
Outdoor Fan Motor Protection
The outdoor fan motor is internally protected against overtemperature.
Control Circuit, 24--V
548J
The control circuit is protected against overcurrent conditions by a circuit breaker mounted on control transformer TRAN. Reset is manual.
COMMERCIAL DEFROST CONTROL
The Commercial Defrost Control Board (DFB) coordinates thermostat demands for supply fan control, 1 or 2 stage cooling, 2 stage heating, emergency heating and defrost control with unit operating sequences. The DFB also provides an indoor fan off delay feature (user selectable). See Fig. 26 for board arrangement.
The High Static option supply fan motor is equipped with a pilot--circuit Thermix combination overtemperature/ overcurrent protection device. This device resets automatically. Do not bypass this switch to correct trouble. Determine the cause and correct it.
The Thermix device is a snap--action overtemperature protection device that is imbedded in the m otor windings. It is a pilot--circuit device that is wired into the unit’s 24–v control circuit. When this switch reaches its trip setpoint, it opens the 24–v control circuit and causes all unit operation to cease. This device resets automatically when the motor windings cool. Do not bypass this switch to correct trouble. Determine the cause and correct it.
The External motor overload device is a specially--calibrated circuit breaker that is UL recognized as a motor overload controller. It is an overcurrent device. When the motor current exceeds the circuit breaker setpoint, the device opens all motor power le ads and the motor shuts down. Reset requires a manual reset at the overload switch. This device (designated IFCB) is located on the side of the supply fan housing, behind the fan access panel.
DIP Switches
Speed-Up Jumpers
C09275
Fig. 26 -- Defrost Control Board (DFB) Arrangement
The DFB is located in the 548J’s main control box (see Fig. 27). All connections are factory--made through harnesses to the unit’s CTB, to IFC (belt--drive mot or) or to ECM (direct--drive motor), reversing valve solenoids and to defrost thermostats. Refer to Table 9 for details of DFB Inputs and Outputs. Detailed unit operating sequences are provided in the Operating Sequences section starting on page 62.
21
548J
C09276
Fig. 27 -- Defrost Control Board (DFB) Location
Table 9 – 548J Defrost Board I/O and Jumper Configurations
Inputs
Point Name Type of I/ O Connection Pin Number Unit Connection Note
GFan D I , 2 4 --- v ac P 2 --- 3 LC T B --- G Y1 Cool 1 D I , 2 4 --- v ac P 2 --- 5 LC TB --- Y 1 Y2 Cool 2 D I , 2 4 --- v ac P 2 --- 4 LC TB --- Y 2 W1 Heat 1 D I , 2 4 --- v ac P 2 --- 7 L C T B --- W 1 W2 Heat 2 D I , 2 4 --- v ac P 2 --- 6 L C T B --- W 2 RPower 2 4 --- v ac P 3 --- 1 C O N T L B R D --- 8 C Common 2 4 --- v ac P 3 --- 2 C O N T L B R D --- 4 DFT1 D I , 2 4 --- v a c D F T --- 1 t o D F T --- 1 DFT 2 D I , 2 4 --- v a c D F T --- 2 t o D F T --- 2
Outputs
Point Name Type of I/ O Connection Pin Number Unit Connection Note
IFO Fan On D O , 2 4 --- v a c P 3 --- 9 R E H E AT --- 2 OF OD Fan On DO , 2 4 --- v a c OF OFR RVS1 DO , 2 4 --- v a c P 3 --- 7 t o P 3 --- 5 Energize in COOL RVS2 DO , 2 4 --- v a c P 3 --- 6 t o P 3 --- 4 Energize in COOL COMP 1 DO , 2 4 --- v ac P 3 --- 1 0 FP T --- R E H E A T --- 6 COMP 2 DO , 2 4 --- v ac P 3 --- 8 R E H E AT --- 8 HEAT 2 D O , 2 4 --- v ac E --- H E A T HC --- 1 ( T B 4 --- 1 ) COM 2 4 --- v ac P 3 --- 3 H C --- 1 ( T B 4 --- 3 )
Configuration
Point Name Type of I/ O Connection Pin Number Unit Connection Note
Select Jumper 2 4 --- v ac P 1 --- 1 2 Compressor 2 4 --- v ac P 1 --- 3 Use for 548J***D
Speed--Up Configuration
Point Name Type of I/ O Connection Pin Number Unit Connection Note
Speed---Up Jumper JMP17 Speed---Up Jumper JMP18
Jumper for 1--3 secs: Factory Test, defrost runs for 9 secs Jumper for 5--20 secs: Forced Defrost, defrost runs for 30 secs if DFT2 is open
Reversing valve control — The DFB has two outputs for unit reversing val ve control. Operation of the reversing valves is based on internal logic; this application does not use an “O” or “B” signal to determine reversing valve position. Re versing valves are energized during the Cooling stages and de--energized during Heating cycles. Once energized at the start of a Cooling stage, the reversing valve will remain energized until the next Heating cycle demand is received. Once de--energized at the start of a Heating cycle, the reversing valves will
remain de -- energized until the next Cooling stage is initiated.
Compressor control The DFB receives inputs indicating Stage 1 Cooling, Stage 2 Cooling (sizes 08 and 09 only) and Stage 1 Heati ng from the space thermostat or unit control system (RTU--MP); it generates commands to start compressors with or without reversing valve operation to produce Stage 1 Cooling (one compressor), Stage 2 Cooling (both compressors run) or Stage 1 Heating (both compressors run).
22
Auxiliary (Electric) Heat control — The 548J unit can be equipped with one or two auxiliary electric heaters, to provide a second stage of Heating. The DFB will energize this Heating system for a Stage 2 Heating command (heaters operate concurrently with both compressors in the Stage 2 Heating cycle), for an Emergency Heating sequence (compressors are off and only the electric heaters are energized) and also during the Defrost cycle (to eliminate a “cold blow” condition in the space).
Defrost — The defrost control mode is a time/temperature sequence. There are two time components: The continuous run period and the test/defrost cycle period. The temperature component is provided by the defrost thermostat(s) (DFT1 and DFT2 (08--09 only) mounted on the outdoor coil.
still open, the defrost test/run window is closed and the control repeats the continuous run period. If DFT2 is closed, the defrost cycle is initiated in Circuit 2. The defrost period will end when DFT2 opens (indicating the outdoor coil has been cleared of frost and ice) or a 10 minute elapsed period expires, whic hever comes first.
On sizes 08--09, Circuit 1’s defrost ther mostat DFT1 (located on the upper circuit of the outdoor coil) cannot initiate a unit defrost cycle; only DFT2 may do this. But once Circuit 2 is in defrost, the DFB will monitor the status of DFT1. If DFT1 closes during a Circuit 2 defrost cycle, Circuit 1 will also enter a defrost cycle. Circuit 1’s defrost cycle will end when DFT1 opens (indicating the upper portion of the outdoor coil is cleared of frost and ice) or the Circuit 2 defrost cycle is terminated.
The continuous run period is a fixed time period between the end of the last defrost cycle (or start of the current Heating cycle) during which no defrost will be permitted. This period can be set at 30, 60, 90 or 120 minutes by changing the positions of DIP switches SW1 and SW2 (see Fig. 28 and Table 10). The default run periods are 30 minutes for unit sizes 04--07 and 90 minutes for unit sizes 08--09.
C09283
Fig. 28 -- DIP Switch Settings — Defrost Board
At the end of the continuous run period, the defrost control will test for a need to defrost. On unit sizes 04--07 (single compressor designs), DFT1 controls the start and termination of the defrost cycle. If DFT1 is still open, the defrost test/run window is closed and the control repeats the continuous run period. If DFT1 is closed, the defrost cycle is initiated. The defrost period will end when DFT1 opens (indicating the outdoor coil has been cleared of frost and ice) or a 10 minute elapsed period expires, whichever comes first.
On unit sizes 08 and 09 (two circuit designs), DFT2 (located on the bottom circuit of the outdoor coil) controls the start and termination of the defrost cycle. If DFT2 is
At the end of the unit defrost cycle, t he unit will be returned to Heating cycle for a full continuous run period.
If the space heating load is satisfied and compressor operation is terminated, the defrost control will remember where the run period was interrupted. On restart in Heating, the defrost control will resume unit operation at the point in the run period where it was last operat ing.
Defrost Thermostats — These are temperature switches that monitor the surface temperature of the outdoor coil circuits. These switches a re mounted on the liquid tube exiting the outdoor coil heating circuits. These switches close on temperature drop at 30_F(--1_C) and reset open on temperature rise at 80_F(27_C).
Indoor Fan Off Delay — The DFB can provide a 30 sec delay on Indoor Fan Off if the thermostat’s fan selector switch is set on AUTO control. DIP Switch SW3 on the DFB selects use of the fan off time delay feature. Setting SW3 in the OPEN position turns the Fan Off Delay feature on; setting SW3 in the CLOSED position disables this feature. The delay period begins when Y1 demand or W1 demand by the space thermostat is removed.
Defrost Speedup Functions — The DFB permits the servicer to speed--up the defrost cycle. There are two speed--up sequences: relative speed--up and an immediate forced defrost. Speed-- up sequences are initiated by shorting jumper wires JMP17 and JMP18 together (see Fig. 26); use a straight--edge screwdriver.
Shorting the jumpers for a period of 1 to 3 secs reduces the defrost timer periods by a factor of 0.1 sec/minute. (For example, the 90 min run period is reduced to 9 secs.) The DFB will step the unit t hrough a Heating cycle and a Defrost cycle using these reduced time periods. This mode ends after the Defrost cycle.
548J
Table 10 – Dip Switch Position
Switch No.
12 12 12 12 3
1
0 J J 0 J 0 J 0 0 J Off
90 minutes
1 J 1 J 1 J J 1 On
60 minutes 30 minutes 120 minutes Fan Delay
23
Shorting the jumpers for a period of 5 to 20 secs bypasses the remaining continuous run period and places the unit in a Forced Defrost mode. If the controlling DFT is closed when this mode is initiated, the unit will complete a normal defrost period that will terminate when the controlling DFT opens or the 10 minute defrost cycle limit is reached. If the controlling DFT is open when this mode is initiated, the Defrost cycle will run for 30 secs. Both modes end at the end of the Defrost cycle.
ELECTRIC HEATERS
548J units may be equipped with field--installed accessory electric heaters. The heaters are modular in design, with heater frames holding open coil resistance wires strung through ceramic insulators, line--break limit switches and a control contact or. One or two heater modules may be used in a unit.
548J
DISCONNECT MOUNTING LOCATION
Unit heaters are marked with Heater Model Numbers. But heaters are ordered as and shipped in cartons marked with a corresponding heater Sale s Package part number. See Table 11 for correlation between heater Model Number and Sales Package part number.
NOTE: The value in position 9 of the part number differs between the sales package part number (value is 1) and a bare heater model number (value is 0).
DISCONNECT MOUNTING LOCATION
MAIN CONTROL BOX
EMT OR RIGID CONDUIT (FIELD-SUPPLIED)
BRACKET AND CONDUIT DRIP BOOT
SINGLE POINT BOX
SINGLE POINT BOX MOUNTING SCREW
CONTROL WIRE TERMINAL BLOCK
HEATER MODULE (LOCATION 1)
CENTER
MANUAL RESET
POST
LIMIT SWITCH
HEATER MODULE (LOCATION 2)
HEATER COVERS
HEATER MOUNTING BRACKET
C08134
Fig. 30 -- T ypical Component Location
UNIT BLOCK-OFF PAN EL
OUTDOOR ACCESS PANEL
INDOOR ACCESS PAN EL
C08133
Fig. 29 -- Typical Access Panel Location (3--6 Ton)
Heater modules are installed in the compa r tment below the indoor (supply) fan outlet. Access is through the indoor access panel. Heater modules slide into the compartment on tracks along the bottom of the heater opening. See Fig. 29, Fig. 30 and Fig. 31.
Not all available heater modules may be used in every unit. Use only those heater modules that are UL listed for use in a specific size unit. Refe r to t he label on the unit cabinet re approved heaters.
Fig. 31 -- T ypical Module Installation
Table 11 – Heater Model Number
Bare Heater Model Number C R H E A T E R 0 0 1 A 0 0
Heater Sales Package PNO Includes:
Bare Heater Carton and packing materials Installation sheet
C R H E A T E R 1 0 1 A 0 0
TRACK
FLANGE
C08135
24
Single Point Boxes and Supplementary Fuses — When the unit MOCP device value exceeds 60--A, unit--mounted supplementary fuses are required for each heater circuit. These fuses are included in accessory Single Point Boxes, with power distribution and fuse blocks. The single point box will be installed directly under the unit control box, just to the left of the partition separating the indoor section (with electric heaters) from the outdoor section. The Single Point Box has a hinged access cover. See Fig. 32.
CONTROL BOX
BUSHING
SINGLE POINT BOX MOUNTING SCREWS
DRIP BOOT BRACKET MOUNTING SCREWS
POWER WIRES
FOAM BUSHING
HEATER RELAYS
HEATER MOUNTING SCREWS
2
1
1
1
2
13
3
21
23
11
13
A L
LIE
D
P A
C O
R P .
M O DE
L
N O .
O
D
ERI
A L
N O.
2
2 . 2
ISTED
AIR
NDITIONING
1 2 3
UIP
ACCESS
346N
.
3
P / N
2-
5
6
1
REV
0
­4
C08136
Fig. 32 -- Typical Single Point Installation
On 548J units, all fuses are 60--A. Single point boxes containing fuses for 208/230--V applications use UL Class RK5 250--V fuses (Bussman FRNR 60 or Shawmut TR 60R). Single point boxes for 460--V and 575--V applications use UL Class T 600--V fuses (Bussman JJS 60 or Shawmut A6T 60). (Note that all heaters are qualified for use with a 60--A fuse, regardless of actual heater ampacity, so only 60--A fuses are necessary.)
Unit heater applications not requiring supplemental fuses require a special Single Point Box without any fuses. Connect power supply conductors to heater conductors and field--supplied base unit power tap leads (see text below re: “Completing Heater Installati on”) inside the empty Single Point Box using UL--approved connec tors.
Safety Devices — Electric heater applications use a combination of line-- break/auto--reset limit switches and a pilot--circuit/manual reset limit switch to protect the unit against over--temperature situations.
Line--break/auto-- reset limit switches are mounted on the base plate of each heater module. See Fig. 33. These are accessed through the indoor access panel. Remove the switch by removing two screws into the base plate and extracting the existing switch.
Pilot--circuit/manual reset limit switch is located in the side plate of the indoor (supply) fan housing. See Fig. 30.
Completing Heater Installation
Field Power Connections — Tap conductors must be
installed between the base unit’s field power connection lugs and the Single Point Box (with or without fuses). Refer to unit wiring schematic. Use copper wire only. For
connection using the Single Point Box less fuses, connect the field power supply conductors to the heater power leads and the field--supplied tap conductors inside the Single Point Box. Use UL--approved pressure connectors (field--supplied) for these splice joints.
Line-Break Limit Switches
21
23
11
13
ALLIED P
A
MODE
L
NO.
OD
ERIAL
NO.
ISTED
AIR
NDITIONING
1
2
3
U
I
P
ACCESS
34
6
N
.
3
P
/ N
2
-
5610-4
RE
V
C08330
Fig. 33 -- Typical Location of Heater Limit Switches
(3--phase heater shown)
Low--Voltage Control Connections Pull the
low--voltage control leads from the heater module(s) -­VIO and BRN (two of each if two modules are installed; identify for Module #1) -- to the 4--pole terminal board TB4 located on the heater bulkhead to the left of Heater #1. Connect the VIO lead from Heater #1 to terminal TB4--1. Connect the VIO lead from Heater #2 to terminal TB4--2. Connect both BRN leads to terminal TB4--3. See Fig. 34.
DEFROST
BOARD
E-HEAT
P3-3
ORN
BRN
ORN BRN
TB4
Field Connections
13
VIO BRN BRN
VIO
Elec Htr
VIO HR2
VIO BRN
BRN
HR1
HR1: On Heater 1 in Position #1 HR2: On Heater 2 in Position #2 (if installed)
C09013
Fig. 34 -- Accessory Electric Heater Control
Connections
548J
25
SMOKE DETECTORS
Sensor
Smoke detectors are a vailable as factory-- installed options on 548J models. Smoke detectors may be specified for Supply Air only or for Return Air without or with economizer or in combination of Supply Air and Return Air. Return Air smoke detectors are arranged for vertical return configurations only. All compone nts necessary for operation are fa ctory--provided and mounted. The unit is factory--configured for immediate smoke detector shutdown operation; additional wiring or modificati ons to unit terminal board may be necessary to complete the unit and smoke detector configuration to meet project requirements.
System
The smoke detector system consists of a four-- wire controller and one or two sensors. Its primary function is
548J
to shut down the rooftop unit in order to prevent smoke from circulating throughout the building. It is not to be used as a life saving device.
Controller
The controller (see Fig. 35) includes a controller housing, a printed circuit board, and a clear plastic cover. The controller can be connected to one or two compatible duct smoke sensors. The clear plastic cover is secured to the housing with a single captive screw for easy access to the wiring terminals. The controller has three LEDs (for Power, Trouble and Alarm) and a manual test/reset button (on the cover face).
The sensor (see Fig. 36) includes a pla stic housing, a printed circuit board, a clear plastic cover, a sampling tube inlet and an exhaust tube. The sampling tube (when used) and exhaust tube are attached during installation. The sampling tube varies in length depending on the size of the rooftop unit. The clear plastic cover permits visual inspections without ha ving to disassemble the sensor. The cover attaches to the sensor housing using four captive screws and forms an airtight cham ber around the sensing electronics. Each sensor includes a harness with an RJ45 terminal for connecting to the controller. Each sensor has four LEDs (for Power, Trouble, Alarm and Dirty) and a manual test/reset button (on the left--side of the housing).
Duct smoke sensor
Exhaust tube
See
Detail A
Intake
gasket
Plug
TSD-CO2
(ordering option)
Sampling tube
(ordered separately)
Exhaust gasket
Sensor housing and electr onics
Cover gasket
(ordering option)
Sensor cover
Controll er housing
and electronics
Conduit c ouplings
(supplie d by installer)
Duct smoke sensor
controller
Conduit nuts
(supplie d by installer)
Conduit s upport plate
Terminal block cover
Fastener
(2X)
Alarm
Troub le
Power
Tes t / r e s e t switch
Fig. 35 -- Controller Assembly
Cover gasket
(ordering option)
Controll er cover
C08208
Magnetic test/reset
switch
Coupling
Alarm
Troub le
Power Dirty
C08209
Detail A
Fig. 36 -- Smoke Detector Sensor
Air is introduced to the duct smoke detector sensor’s sensing chamber through a sampling tube that extends into the HVAC duct and is directed back into the ventilation system through a (shorter) exhaust tube. The difference in air pressure between the two tubes pulls the sampled air through the sensing chamber. When a sufficient amount of smoke is detected in the sensing chamber, the sensor signals an alarm state and the controller automatically takes the appropriate action to shut down fans and blowers, change over air handling systems, notify the fire alarm control panel, etc.
The sensor uses a process called differential sensing to prevent gradual environmental changes from triggering false alarms. A rapid change in environmental conditions,
26
such as smoke from a fire, causes the sensor to signal an alarm state but dust and debris accumulated over time does not.
For installations using two sensors, the duct smoke detector does not differentiate which sensor signals an alarm or trouble condition.
Smoke Detector Locations
Supply Air — The Supply Air smoke detector sensor is located to the left of the unit’s indoor (supply) fan. See Fig. 37. Access is through the fan access panel. There is no sampling tube used at this location. The sampling tube inlet extends through the side plat e of the fan housing (into a high pressure area). The controller is located on a bracket to the right of the return filter, accessed through the lift--off filter panel.
Return Air with Economizer — The sampling tube is inserted through the side plates of the economizer housing, placing it across the return air opening on the unit basepan. See Fig. 39. The holes in the sampling tube face downward, into the return air stream. The sampling tube is connected via tubing t o the return a ir sensor that is mounted on a bracket high on the partition between return filter and controller location. (This sensor is shipped in a flat--mounting location. Installation requires that this sensor be re located to its operating location and the tubing to the sampling tube be connected. See “Completing Installation of Return Air Smoke Sensor” for installation steps.)
548J
Return Air Sampling Tube
Smoke Detector Sensor
C08245
Fig. 37 -- T ypical Supply Air Smoke Detector Sensor
Location
Return Air without Economizer — The sampling tube is located across the return air opening on the unit basepan. See Fig. 38. The holes in the sampling tube face downward, into the return air stream. The sampling tube is connected via tubing to the return air sensor that is mounted on a bracket high on the partition between return filter and controller location. (This sensor is shipped in a flat--mounting location. Installation requires that this sensor be re located to its operating location and the tubing to the sampling tube be connected. See “Completing Installation of Return Air Smoke Sensor” for installation steps.)
Return Air Detector module (shipping position shown)*
Controller module
Return Air Detector Sampling Tube
*RA detector must be moved from shipping position to operating position by installer
C07307
Fig. 38 -- Typical Return Air Detector Location
C08129
Fig. 39 -- Return Air Sampling Tube Location
Completing Installation of Return Air Smoke Sensor:
SCREWS
EXHAUST TUBE
FLEXIBLE EXTENSION TUBE
SAMPLING
C08126
Fig. 40 -- Return Air Detector Shipping Position
1. Unscrew the two screws holding the Return Air Sensor detector plate. See Fig. 40. Save the screws.
2. Remove the Return Air Sensor and its detector plate.
3. Rotate the detector plate so the sensor is facing out­wards and t he sampling tube connecti on is on the bot­tom. See Fig. 41.
4. Screw the sensor and detector plate into its operating position using screws from Step 1. Make sure the sampling tube connection is on the bot tom and the ex­haust tube is on the top. See Fig. 41.
5. Connect the flexible tube on the sampling inlet to the sampling tube on the basepan.
27
6. For units with an economizer, the sampling tube is in­tegrated into the economizer housing but the connec­tion of the flexible tubing to the sampling tube is the same.
548J
Fig. 41 -- Return Air Sensor Operating Position
FIOP Smoke Detector Wiring and Response
All units: FIOP smoke detector is configured to automatically shut down all unit ope rations when smoke condition is detected. See Fig. 42, Typical Smoke Detector System Wiring.
Highlight A: JMP 3 is factory--cut, transferring unit control to smoke detector.
C08127
Highlight B: Smoke detector NC contact set will open on smoke al arm condition, de--energizing the ORN conductor.
Highlight C: 24--v power signal via ORN lead is removed at Smoke Detector input on CTB (Control Terminal Board); all unit operations cease immediately.
Highlight D: On smoke alarm condition, the smoke detector NO Alarm contact will close, supplying 24 --v power to GRA conductor.
Highlight E: GRA lead at Smoke Alarm input on CTB provides 24--v signal to FIOP DDC control.
RTU--MP: The 24--v signal is conveyed to RTU--MP’s J1--10 input terminal. This signal initiates the FSD sequence by the RTU--MP control. FSD status is reported to connected BAS network.
Using Remote Logic: Five conductors are provided for field use (see Highlight F in Fig. 42) for additional annunciation functions.
Additional Application Data — Refer to Cat alog No. HKRNKA--1XA for discussions on additional control features of these smoke detectors including multiple unit coordination. See Fig. 42.
B
D
C
F
E
A
Fig. 42 -- Typical Smoke Detector System Wiring
28
C08246
Sensor and Controller Tests
Sensor Alarm Test
The sensor alarm test checks a sensor’s ability to signal an alarm state. This test requires that you use the factory provided SD--MAG test magnet. The magnet (which is approximately 1.0 in. long. x plastic bag in the unit control box.
!
CAUTION
OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result i n personnel and authority concern.
This test places the duct detector into the alarm state. Unless part of the test, disconnect all auxiliary equipment from the controller before performing the test. If the duct detector is connected to a fire alarm system, notify the proper authorities before performing the test.
Sensor Alarm Test Procedure
1. Hold the test magnet where indicated on the side of the sensor housing for seven seconds.
2. Verify that the sensor’s Alarm LED turns on.
3. Reset the sensor by holding the t est magnet against the sensor housing for two seconds.
4. Verify that the sensor’s Alarm LED turns off.
1
/4in. sq.) is located in a
Controller Alarm Test
The controller alarm test checks the controller’s ability to initiate and indicate an a larm state.
!
CAUTION
OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result i n personnel and authority concern.
This test places the duct detector into the alarm state. Disconnect all auxiliary equipment from the controller before performing the test. If the duct detector is connected to a fire alarm system, notify the proper authorities before performing the test.
Controller Alarm Test Procedure
1. Press the controller’s test/reset switch for seven seconds.
2. Verify that the controller’s Alarm LED turns on.
3. Reset the sensor by pressing the test/reset switch for two seconds.
4. Verify that the controller’s Alarm LED turns off.
Dirty Controller Test
The dirty controller test checks the controller’s ability to initiate a dirty sensor test and indicate its results.
!
CAUTION
OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result i n personnel and authority concern.
Pressing the controller’s test/reset switch for longer than seven seconds will put the duct detector i nto the alarm state and activate all automatic alarm responses.
Dirty Controller Test Procedure
1. Press the controller’s test/reset switch for two seconds.
2. Verify that the controller’s Trouble LED flashes.
Dirty Sensor Test
The dirty sensor test provides an indication of the sensor ’s ability to compensate for gradual environmental changes. A sensor that can no longer compensate for environmental changes is considered 100% dirty and requires cleaning or replacing. You must use the factory provided SD--MAG test magnet to initiate a sensor dirty test. The sensor’s Dirty LED indicates the results of the dirty test as shown in Table 12.
!
CAUTION
OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result i n personnel and authority concern.
Holding the test magnet against the sensor housing for more than seven seconds will put the duct detector into the alarm state and activate all automatic alarm responses.
Tabl e 12 – D i rty L ED Te st
FLASHES DESCRIPTION
1 0---25% dirty. (Typical of a newly installed detector) 2 25- -- 50% dirty 3 51- -- 75% dirty 4 76- -- 99% dirty
Dirty Sensor Test Procedure
1. Hold the test magnet where indicated on the side of the sensor housing for two seconds.
2. Verify that the sensor’s Dirty LED flashes.
548J
29
!
CAUTION
OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result i n personnel and authority concern.
Changing the dirty sensor test operation will put the detector into the alarm state and activate all automatic alarm responses. Before changing dirty sensor test operation, disconnect all auxiliary equipment from the controller and notify the proper authorities if connected to a fire alarm system.
Changing the Dirty Sensor Test
By default, sensor dirty test results are indicated by:
S The sensor’s Dirty LED flashing. S The controller’s Trouble LED fla shing.
548J
S The controller’s supervision relay contacts toggle. The operation of a sensor’s dirty test can be changed so that the controller’s supervision relay is not used to indicate test results. When two detectors are connected to a controller, sensor dirty test operation on both sensors must be configured to operate in the same manner.
To Configure the Dirty Sensor Test
Operation
1. Hold the test magnet where indicated on the side of the sensor housing until the sensor’s Alarm LED turns on and its Dirty LED flashes twice (approximately 60 seconds).
2. Reset the sensor by removing the test magnet then holding it against the sensor housing again until the sensor’s Alarm LED turns off (approximately 2 seconds).
Remote Station Test
The remote station alarm test checks a test/reset station’s ability to initiate and indicate an alarm state.
!
CAUTION
Remote Test/Reset Station Dirty Sensor Test
The test/reset station dirty sensor test checks the test/reset station’s ability to initiate a sensor dirty test and indicate the results. It must be wired to the controller as shown in Fig. 43 and configured to operate the controller’s supervision relay. For more information, see “Changing the Dirty Sensor Test.”
12
1
3
Wire must be
added by installer
TB3
1
2
14
Supervision relay contacts [3]
13
19
15
2
20
Fig. 43 -- Remote Test/Reset Station Connections
!
CAUTION
OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result i n personnel and authority concern.
If the test/reset station’s key switch is left in the RESET/TEST position for longer than seven seconds, the detector will automatically go into the alarm state and activate all automatic alarm responses.
Smoke Detector Controller
Auxiliary
equipment
+
18 Vdc (+)
18 Vdc (
)
CRSDTEST001A00
Tro uble
5
Power
4
Alarm
1
Reset/ Test
3
2
C09326
OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result i n personnel and authority concern.
This test places the duct detector into the alarm state. Unless part of the test, disconnect all auxiliary equipment from the controller before performing the test. If the duct detector is connected to a fire alarm system, notify the proper authorities before performing the test.
CRSDTEST001A00 Remote Alarm Test Procedure
1. Turn the key switch to the RESET/TEST position for seven seconds.
2. Verify that the test/reset station’s Alarm LED turns on.
3. Reset the sensor by turni ng the key switch to the RESET/TEST position for two seconds.
4. Verify that the test/reset station’s Alarm LED turns off.
!
CAUTION
OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result i n personnel and authority concern.
Holding the test magnet to the target area for longer than seven seconds will put the detector into the alarm state and activate all automatic alarm responses.
Dirty Sensor T est Using an CRSDTEST001A00
1. Turn the key switch to the RESET/TEST position for two seconds.
2. Verify that the test/reset stat ion’s Trouble LED flashes.
30
Table 13 – Detector Indicators
CONTROL OR INDICATOR DESCRIPTION
Magnetic test/reset switch Resets the sensor when it is in the alarm or trouble state. Activates or tests the sensor when it is in
Alarm LED Indicates the sensor is in the alarm state.
Troub le LE D Indicates the sensor is in the trouble state.
Dirty LED Indicates the amount of environmental compensation used by the sensor
Power LED Indicates the sensor is energized.
the normal state.
(flashing continuously = 100%)
Detector Cleaning
Cleaning the Smoke Detector
Clean the duct smoke sensor when the Dirty LED is flashing continuously or sooner if conditions warrant.
!
CAUTION
OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARD
Failure to follow this caution may result i n personnel and authority concern.
If the smoke detector is connected to a fire alarm system, first notify the proper authorities that the detector is undergoing maintenance then disable the relevant circuit to avoid generating a false alarm.
1. Disconnect power from the duct de tector then remove the sensor’s cover. (See Fig. 44. )
2. Using a vacuum cleaner, clean compressed air, or a soft bristle brush, remove loose dirt and debris from inside the sensor housing and cover. Use isopropyl alcohol and a lint--free cloth to remove dirt and other contaminants from the gasket on the sensor’s cover.
3. Squeeze the retainer clips on both sides of the optic housing then lift the housing away from the printed circuit board.
4. Gently remove dirt and debris from around the optic plate and inside the optic housing.
5. Replace the optic housing and sensor cover.
6. Connect power to the duct detector then perform a sensor alarm test.
Sampling
tube
Airow
HVAC duct
Sensor housing
Optic plate
Retainer clip
Optic housing
Indicators
Normal State
The smoke detector operates in the normal state in the absence of any trouble conditions and when its sensing chamber is fre e of smoke. In the normal state, the Power LED on both the sensor and the controller are on and all other LEDs are off.
Alarm
The smoke detector enters the alarm state when the amount of smoke particulate in the sensor’s sensing chamber exceeds the alarm threshold value. (See Table 13.) Upon entering the alarm state:
The SuperDuct duct smoke de tector enters the trouble state under the following conditions:
An internal sensor fault is detected upon entering the trouble state:
State
S The sensor’s Alarm LED and the controller’s Alarm
LED turn on.
S The contacts on the controller’s two auxiliary relays
switch positions.
S The contacts on the controller’s alarm initiation relay
close.
S The controller’s remote alarm LED output is a ctivated
(turned on).
S The controller’s high impedance multiple fan shutdown
control line i s pulled to ground Trouble state.
S A sensor’s cover is removed and 20 minutes pass before
it is properly secured.
S A sensor’s environmental compensation limit is reached
(100% dirty).
S A wiring fault between a sensor and the controller is
detected.
S The contacts on the controller’s supervisory relay
switch positions. (See Fig. 45.)
S If a sensor t rouble, the sensor’s Trouble LED and the
controller’s Trouble LED turn on.
S If 100% dirty, the sensor’s Dirty LED turns on and the
controller’s Trouble LED flashes continuously.
S If a wiring fault between a sensor and the controller, the
controller’s Trouble LED turns on but not the sensor’s.
548J
Fig. 44 -- Sensor Cleaning Diagram
C07305
31
Alarm
Fig. 45 -- Controller Assembly
NOTE: All troubles are latched by the duct smoke
detector. The trouble condition must be cleared and then the duct smoke detector must be reset in order to restore it to the normal state.
Resetting Alarm and Trouble Condition Trips:
548J
Manual reset is required to restore smoke detector systems to Normal operation. For installations using two sensors, the duct smoke detector does not differentiate which sensor signals an alarm or trouble condition. Check each sensor for Alarm or Trouble status (indicated by LED). Clear the condition that has generated the trip at this sensor. Then reset the sensor by pressing and holding the reset button (on the side) for 2 seconds. Verify that the sensor’s Alarm and Trouble L EDs are now off. At the controller, clea r its Alarm or Trouble state by pressing and holding the manual reset button (on the front cover) for 2 seconds. Verify that the controller’s Alarm and Trouble LEDs are now off. Replace all panels.
Troubleshooting
Controller’s Trouble LED is On
1. Check the Trouble LED on each sensor connected to the controller. If a sensor’s Trouble LED is on, de­termine the cause and make the necessary repairs.
2. Check the wiring between the sensor and the control­ler. If wiring is loose or missing, repair or replace as required.
Tro uble
Power
Test/reset switch
C07298
Controller’s Trouble LED is
Flashing
1. One or both of the sensors is 100% dirty.
2. Determine which Dirty LED is flashing then clean that sensor assembly as described in the detector cleaning section.
Sensor’s Trouble LED is
On
1. Check the sensor’s Dirty LED. If it is flashing, the sensor is dirty and must be cleaned.
2. Check the sensor’s cover. If it is loose or missing, se­cure the cover to the sensor housing.
3. Replace sensor assembly.
Sensor’s Power LED is
Off
1. Check the controller’s Power LED. If it is off, de­termine why the controller does not have power and make the necessary repairs.
2. Check the wiring between the sensor and the control­ler. If wiring is loose or missing, repair or replace as required.
Controller’s Power LED is
Off
1. Make sure the circui t supplying power to the control­ler is operational. If not, make sure JP2 and JP3 are set correctly on the controller before applying power.
2. Verify that powe r is applied to the controller’s supply input terminals. If power is not present, replace or re­pair wiring as required.
Remote Test/Reset Station’s Trouble LED Does
Not flash When Performing a Dirty Test, But the Contr ler’s Trouble LED
Does
1. Verify that the remote test/station is wired as shown in Fig. 43. Repair or replace loose or missing wiring.
2. Configure the sensor dirty test to activate the control­ler’s supervision relay. See “To Configure the Dirty Sensor Test Operation” for details.
Sensor’s Trouble LED is On, But the Controller’ Tr ouble LED is
OFF
s
Remove JP1 on the controller.
ol-
32
RTU--MP CONTROL SYSTEM
The RTU--MP controller, see Fig. 46, provides expanded stand--alone operation of the HVAC system plus connection and control through communication with several Building Automation Systems (BAS) through popular third--party network systems. The available network systems are BACnet MP/TP, Modbus and Johnson J2. Communication with LonWorks is also possible by adding an accessory interface card to the RTU--MP. Selection of the communication protocol and baud rate are made at on--board DIP switches.
Bryant’s diagnostic display tools BACviewer6 Handheld and Virtual BACview (loaded on a portable PC) must be
used with the RTU--MP controller. Connection to the RTU--MP board is at the J12 access port, see Fig. 46.
The RTU--MP control is factory--mounted in the 548J unit’s main control box, to the left of the CTB. See Fig. 47 (or Fig. 48). Factory wiring is complet ed through harnesses connected to the CTB. Field connections for RTU--MP sensors will be made at the Phoenix connectors on the RTU--MP board. The factory--installed RTU--MP control includes the supply--air temperature (SAT) sensor. The outdoor air temperature (OAT) sensor is included in the FIOP/accessory EconoMi$er 2 package.
Refer to Table 14, RTU--MP Controller Inputs and Outputs for locations of al l connections to the RTU--MP board.
548J
Fig. 46 -- RTU--MP Multi--Protocol Control Board
33
C07129
548J
C099015
34
Fig. 47 -- RTU--MP System Control Wiring Diagram – 548J*04A — 548J*07A Units
C099025
548J
35
Fig. 48 -- RTU--MP System Control Wiring Diagram – 548J*08D & 548J*09D Units
Table 14 – RTU--MP Controller Inputs and Outputs
POINT NAME
Space Temperature Sensor sptsens AI (10K Thermistor) J2 0 --- 1 , 2 Supply Air Temperature sat AI (10K Thermistor) J 2 --- 1 , 2 Local Outside Air Temperature Sensor oatsens AI (10K Thermistor) J 2 --- 3 , 4 Space Temperature Offset Pot sptopot AI (100K Potentiometer) J 20 --- 3 Indoor Air Quality iaq A I ( 4 --- 2 0 m a) J4 --- 2 , 3 Outdoor Air Quality oaq AI ( 4 --- 2 0 m a) J4 --- 5 , 6 Safety Chain Feedback safety DI (24 VAC) J 1 --- 9 Compressor Safety compstat DI (24 VAC) J 1 --- 2 Fire Shutdown firedown DI (24 VAC) J 1 --- 1 0 Enthalpy Switch enthalpy DI (24 VAC) J 2 --- 6 , 7 Humidistat Input Status humstat DI (24 VAC) J 5 --- 7 , 8
548J
Space Relative Humidity sprh A I ( 4 --- 2 0 m a) Outside Air Relative Humidity oarh A I ( 4 --- 2 0 m a ) Supply Fan Status fanstat DI (24 VAC) Filter Status filtstat DI (24 VAC) Remote Occupancy Input remocc DI (24 VAC)
Economizer Commanded Position econocmd 4 --- 2 0m a J 2 --- 5 SupplyFanRelayState sf DO Relay (24VAC , 1A) J 1 --- 4 Compressor 1 Relay State comp_1 DO Relay (24VAC , 1A) J1 --- 8 Compressor 2 Relay State comp_2 DO Relay (24VAC , 1A) J1 --- 7 Heat Stage 1 Relay State heat_1 DO Relay (24VAC , 1A) J 1 --- 6 Heat Stage 2 Relay State heat_2 DO Relay (24VAC , 1A) J 1 --- 5 Power Exhaust Relay State aux_2 DO Relay (24VAC , 1A) J 11 --- 3 Dehumidification Relay State humizer DO Relay (24VAC, 1A) J 1 1 --- 7 , 8
LEGEND AI --- A n a l o g I n p u t AO --- A n a l o g O u t p u t DI --- D is c r e t e I np ut DO --- Discrete Output
* These inputs (if installed) take the place of the default input on the specific channel according to schematic. P a r a ll el p i n s J 5 --- 1 = J 2 --- 6 , J 5 --- 3 = J 1 --- 1 0, J 5 --- 5 = J 1 --- 2 a re u se d f o r f i e l d --- i n s t a l la ti o n . Refer to the input configuration and accessory sections for more detail.
BACnet OBJECT
NAME
INPUTS
CONFIGURABLE INPUTS*
OUTPUTS
TYPE OF I/O
CONNECTION PIN
NUMBERS
J4--- 2,3 or J4---5,6
J 5 --- 1 , 2 o r J 5 --- 3 , 4 o r
J5 5,6 or J5 ---7,8
The RTU--MP controller requires the use of a Bryant space sensor. A standard thermostat cannot be used with the RTU--MP system.
Supply Air Temperature (SAT) Sensor On FIOP--equipped 548J unit, the unit is supplied with a supply--air temperature (SAT) sensor (33ZCSENSAT). This sensor is a tubular probe type, approx 6--inches (153 mm) in length. It is a nominal 10-- k ohm thermistor. See Table 15 for temperature-- resistance characteristic.
The SAT is factory--wired. The SAT probe is wire--tied to the supply--air opening (on the horizontal opening end) in its shipping position. Remove the sensor for installation. Re--position the sensor in the flange of the supply--a ir opening or in the supply air duct (as required by local
1
codes). Drill or punch a
/2--in. (12.7 mm) hole in the flange or duct. Use two field--supplied, self--drilling screws to secure the sensor probe in a horizontal orientation. See Fig. 49.
SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
SUPPLY AIR
RETURN AIR
Fig. 49 -- T ypical Mounting Location for Supply Air
Temperature (SAT) Sensor on Small Rooftop Units
36
ROOF CURB
C08200
Table 15 – Thermistor Resistance vs Temperature Values for Space Temperature Sensor, Supply Air
Temperature Sensor, and Outdoor Air Temperature
Sensor
RACEWAY
TEMP
(C)
--- 4 0 --- 40 335,651
--- 3 5 --- 31 242,195
--- 3 0 --- 22 176,683
--- 2 5 --- 13 130,243
--- 2 0 --- 4 96,974
--- 1 5 5 72,895
--- 1 0 14 55,298
--- 5 23 42,315 0 32 32,651 5 41 25,395
10 50 19,903 15 59 15,714 20 68 12,494 25 77 10,000 30 86 8,056 35 95 6,530 40 104 5,325 45 113 4,367 50 122 3,601 55 131 2,985 60 140 2,487 65 149 2,082 70 158 1,752
TEMP
(F)
RESISTANCE
(Ohms)
NOTE: The sensor must be mounted in the discharge airstream downstream of the cooling coil and any heating devices. Be sure the probe tip does not come in contact with any of the unit’s heater surfaces.
Outdoor Air T emperature (OAT) Sensor — The OAT is factory--mounted in the EconoMi$er 2 (FIOP or accessory). It is a nominal 10k ohm thermistor attached to an eyelet mounting ring. See Table 15 for temperature--resistance characteristic.
EconoMi$er 2 — The RTU--MP control is used with EconoMi$er2 (option or accessory) for outdoor air management. The damper position is controlled directly by the RTU--MP control; EconoMi$er 2 has no i nternal logic device.
HOLE IN END PANEL (HIDDEN)
C08027
Fig. 50 -- Field Control Wiring Raceway
Space Temperature (SPT) Sensors
A field-- supplied Bryant space temperature sensor is required with the RTU--MP to monitor space temperature. There are 3 sensors available for this application:
S 33ZCT55SPT, space temperature sensor with override
button
S 33ZCT56SPT, space temperature sensor with override
button and setpoint adjustment
S 33ZCT59SPT, space tempe rature sensor wit h LCD
(liquid crystal display) screen, ove rride button, and setpoint adjustment
Use 20 gauge wire to connect the sensor to the cont roller. The wire is suitable for distances of up to 500 ft. Use a three--conductor shielded cable for the sensor and setpoint adjustment connections. If the setpoint adjustment (slidebar) is not required, then an unshielded, 18 or 20 gauge, two--conductor, twisted pair cable may be used.
Connect T--55 -- See Fig. 51 for typical T--55 internal connections. Connect the T--55 SEN terminals to RTU--MP J20--1 and J20--2. See Fig. 52.
548J
Outdoor air management functions can be enhanced with field--installation of these accessory control devices:
Enthalpy control (outdoor air or differential sensors) Space CO Outdoor air CO
sensor
2
sensor
2
Field Connections — Field connections for accessory sensors and input devices are made the RTU--MP, at plugs J1, J2, J4, J5, J11 and J20. All field control wiring that connects to the RTU--MP must be routed through the raceway built into the corner post as shown in Fig. 50. The raceway provides the UL required clearance between high-- and low--voltage wiring. Pass the control wires through the hole provided in the corner post, then feed the wires thorough the raceway to the RTU--MP. Connect to the wires to the removable Phoenix connectors and then reconnect the connectors to the board.
2
3
SW1
45
SEN
61
RED(+)
WHT(GND)
BLK(-)
BRN (GND) BLU (SPT)
CCN COM
SENSOR WIRING
Fig. 51 -- T--55 Space Temperature Sensor Wiring
37
C08201
SEN
SEN
J20-1
J20-2
Fig. 52 -- RTU--MP T--55 Sensor Connections
C08460
OR SET SEN
BRN (COM)
BLK (STO)
BLU (SPT)
SENSOR
WIRING
Connect T--56 -- See Fig. 53 for T--56 internal connections. Install a jumper between SEN and SET terminals a s illustrated. Connect T--56 terminals to RTU--MP J20--1, J20--2 and J20--3 per Fig. 54.
548J
2
3
SW1
Cool Warm
45
SEN
61
RED(+)
WHT(GND)
BLK(-)
SET
BLK (T56)
BRN (GND) BLU (SPT)
CCN COM
SENSOR WIRING
JUMPER TERMINALS AS SHOWN
Fig. 53 -- T--56 Internal Connections
SEN J20-1
C08202
OPB COM- PWR+
POWER
24 VAC
NOTE: Must use a separate isolated transformer.
WIRING
C07132
Fig. 55 -- Space Temperature Sensor Typical Wiring
(33ZCT59SPT)
Economizer controls —
Outdoor Air E nthalpy Control (PNO 33CSENTHSW) --
The enthalpy control (33CSENTHSW) is available as a field--installed accessory to be used with the EconoMi$er2 damper system. The outdoor air enthalpy sensor is part of the enthalpy control. (The separate field--installed accessory return air enthalpy sensor (33CSENTSEN) is required for differential enthalpy control. See “Return Air Enthalpy Sensor” for details.)
Locate the enthalpy control in the economizer next to the Actuator Motor. Locate two GRA leads in the factory harness and connect the gray lead labeled “ESL” to the terminal labeled “LOW”. See Fig. 56. Connect the enthalpy control power input terminals to economizer actuator power leads RED (connect to 24V) and BLK (connect to GND).
SEN
Jumper
J20-2
SET
SET
J20-3
C08461
Fig. 54 -- RTU--MP T--56 Sensor Connections
Connect T--59 -- The T--59 space sensor requires a separate, isolated power supply of 24 VAC. See Fig. 55 for internal connections at the T--59. Connect the SEN terminal (BLU) to RTU--MP J20--1. Connect the COM terminal (BRN) to J20--2. Connect the SET terminal (STO or BLK) to J20--3.
Enthalpy Switch
24V
GND
LOW
RED
BLK
GRA
ESL
7
ECONO MOTOR
CTB ECON
Factory Wiring Harness
C09026
Fig. 56 -- Enthalpy Switch (33CSENTHSW) Connections
The outdoor enthalpy changeover setpoint is set at the enthalpy controller.
The enthalpy control receives the outdoor air enthalpy from the outdoor air enthalpy sensor and provides a dry contact switch input to the RTU--MP controller. A closed contact indicates that outside air is preferred to the return air. An open contact indicates that the economizer should remain at minimum position.
38
Differential Enthalpy Control — Differential enthalpy control is provided by sensing and comparing the outside air and return air enthalpy condi tions. Install the outdoor air enthalpy control as described above. Add and install a return air enthalpy sensor.
Return Air Enthalpy Sensor — Mount the return--air enthalpy sensor (33CSENTSEN) in the return--air section of the ecomomizer. The return air sensor is wired to the enthalpy controller (33CSENTHSW). See Fig. 57.
24V – 4-20 Main
+ VDC Out
GND
LOW
RED
BLK
GRA
ESL
ECONO MOTOR
HG
+
24 VAC
OR
-
24 VDC
+
0-10VDC
-
SIG COM (J4-6)
+
4-20mA (J4-5)
ALARM
NC COM
RELAY
}
CONTACTS
NO
2
1
5
1
4
32
7
6
8
548J
+ 24-36 VDC In
– 4-20 Main Out
C09027
Fig. 57 -- Outside and Return Air Enthalpy Sensor
Wiring
To wire the return air enthalpy sensor, perform the following:
1. Use a 2 --conductor, 18 or 20 AWG, twisted pair cable to connect the return air enthalpy sensor to the enthalpy controller.
2. Connect the field--supplied RED wire to (+) spade connector on the return air enthalpy sensor and the (+) terminal on the enthalpy controller. Connect the BLK wire to (--) spade connector on the return air enthalpy sensor and the (--) terminal on the enthalpy controller.
Indoor Air Quality (CO
sensor) — The indoor air quality
2
sensor accessory monitors space carbon dioxide (CO levels. This information is used to monitor IAQ levels. Several types of sensors are available, for wall mounting in the space or in return duct, with and without LCD display, and in combination with space temperature sensors. Sensors use infrared t echnology to measure the levels of CO
The CO
present in the space air.
2
sensors are all factory set for a range of 0 to
2
2000 ppm and a linear mA output of 4 to 20. Refer to the instructions supplied with the CO
sensor for electrical
2
requirements and terminal locations. See Fig. 58 for typical CO
sensor wiring schematic.
2
C07134
Fig. 58 -- Indoor/Outdoor Air Quality (CO2)Sensor
(33ZCSENCO
) -- Typical Wiring Diagram
2
To accurately monitor the quality of the air in the conditioned air space, locate the sensor near a return--air grille (if present) so it senses the concentration of CO
2
leaving the space. The sensor should be mounted in a location to avoid direct breath contact.
Do not mount the IAQ sensor in drafty areas such as near supply ducts, open windows, fans, or over heat sources. Allow at least 3 ft (0.9 m) between the sensor and any corner. Avoid mounting the sensor where it is influenced by the supply air; the sensor gives inaccurate readings if the supply air is blown directly onto the sensor or if the supply air does not have a chance to mix with the room air before it is drawn i nto the return airstream.
Wiring the Indoor Air Quality Sensor —
For each sensor, use two 2--conductor 18 AWG (American
)
2
Wire Gage) twisted--pair cables (unshielded) to connect the separate isolated 24 vac power source to the sensor and to connect the sensor to the control board terminals.
To connect the sensor to the control, identify the positive (4 to 20 mA) and ground (SIG COM) terminals on the sensor. See Fig. 58. Connect the 4--20 mA terminal to RTU--MP J4--2 and connect the SIG COM terminal to RTU--MP J4--3. See Fig. 59.
IAQ Sensor
SEN
J4-2
39
COM
24 VAC
Fig. 59 -- RTU--MP / Indoor CO2Sensor
(33ZCSENCO2) Connections
J4-3
C08462
Outdoor Air Quality Sensor (PNO 33ZCSENCO2 plus weatherproof enclosure) — The outdoor air CO designed to monitor carbon dioxide (CO
) levels in the
2
outside ventilation air and interface with the ventilation damper in an HVAC system. The OAQ sensor is packaged with an outdoor cover. See Fig. 60. The outdoor air CO sensor must be located in the economizer outside air hood.
548J
COVER REMOVED SIDE VIEW
Fig. 60 -- Outdoor Air Quality Sensor Cover
Wiring the Outdoor Air CO
Sensor — A dedicated power
2
supply is required for this sensor. A two--wire ca ble is required to wire the dedicated power supply for the sensor. The two wires should be connected to the power supply and terminals 1 and 2.
To connect the sensor to the control, identify the positive (4 to 20 mA) and ground (SIG COM) terminals on the OAQ sensor. See Fig. 58. Connect the 4--20 mA terminal to RTU--MP J4--5. Connect the SIG COM terminal to RTU--MP J4--6. See Fig. 61.
sensor is
2
C07135
Alarm state is reset when the smoke detector alarm condition is cleared and reset at the smoke detector in the unit.
Connecting Discrete Inputs
Filter Status
2
The filter status accessory is a field--installed accessory. This accessory detects plugged filters. When installing this accessory, the unit must be configured for filter status by setting MENU
Config→Inputs→input3,5,8,or9
to Filter Status and normally open (N/O) or normally closed (N/C). Input 8 or 9 is recommended for easy of installation. Refer to Fig. 46, Fig. 47 and Fig. 48 for wire terminations at J5.
Status
Fan
The fan status accessory is a field--installed accessory. This accessory detects when the indoor fan i s blowing air. When installing this accessory, the unit must be configured for fan status by setting
MENU
Config→Inputs→input3,5,8,or9to Fan
Status and normally open (N/O) or normally closed (N/C). Input 8 or 9 is recommended for easy of installation. Refer to Fig. 46, Fig. 47, and Fig. 48 for wire terminations at J5.
Remote
Occupancy
The remote occupancy accessory is a field -- installed accessory. This accessory overrides the unoccupied mode and puts the unit in occupied mode. When installing this accessory, the unit must be configured for remote
occupancy by setting MENU
Config→Inputs→input 3,
5, 8, or 9 to Remote Occupancy and normall y open (N/O)
or normally closed (N/C).
Also set MENU
Schedules→occupancy source to DI
on/off. Input 8 or 9 is recomme nded for easy of installation. Refer to Fig. 46 and Table 14 for wire terminations at J5.
Power Exhaust (output)
OAQ Sensor/RH Sensor
SEN
COM
24 VAC
J4-5
J4-6
C08463
Fig. 61 -- RTU--MP / Outdoor CO2Sensor
(33ZCSENCO2) Connections
On 548J units equipped with factory--installed Smoke Detector(s), the smoke detector controller implements the unit shutdown through its NC contact set connected to the unit’s CTB input. The FSD function is initiated via the smoke detector’s Alarm NO contact set. The RTU--MP controller communicates the smoke detector’s tripped status to the BAS building control. See Fig. 42 for unit smoke detector wiring.
The Fire Shutdown Switch configuration,
MENU
Config→Inputs→input 5, identifies the
normally open status of this input when there is no fire alarm.
Connect the accessory Power Exhaust contactor coil(s) per Fig. 62.
Power Exhaust
PEC
TAN
J11-3
CTB
THERMOSTAT
GRA
Fig. 62 -- RTU--MP Power Exhaust Connections
Space Relative Humidity Sensor -- The RH sensor is not used with 548J models at this time.
Communication Wiring -- Protocols
General
Protocols are the communicati on languages spoken by control devices. The main purpose of a protocol is to communicate information in the most efficient method possible. Different protocols exist to provide different kinds of information for different applications. In the BAS application, many different protocols are used, depending
C
C08464
40
on manufacturer. Protocols do not change the function of a controller; just make the front end user different.
The RTU--MP can be set to communicate on four different protocols: BACnet, Modbus, N2, and LonWorks. Switch 3 (SW3) on the board is used to set protocol and baud rate. Switches 1 and 2 (SW1 and SW2) are used to set the board’s network address. See Fig. 63 for the switch setting per protocol. The 3rd party connection to the RTU--MP is through plug J19.
NOTE: Power must be cycled after changing the SW1--3 switch settings.
BACnet
MS/TP
BACnet Master Slave/Token Passing (MS/TP) is used for communicating BACnet over a sub--network of BACnet--only controllers. This is the default Bryant communications protocol. Each RTU--MP module acts as an MS/TP Master. The speed of an MS/TP network can range from 9600 to 76.8K baud. Physical Addresses ca n be set from 01 to 99.
Modbus
The RTU--MP module can speak the Modicon Modbus RTU Protocol as described in the Modi con Modbus Protocol Reference Guide, PI--MBUS--300 Rev. J.The speed of a Modbus network can range from 9600 to 76.8K baud. Physical Addresses can be set from 01 to 99.
Johnson
N2
N2 is not a standard protocol, but one that was created by Johnson Controls, Inc. that has been made open and available to the public. The speed of N2 network is limited to only 9600 baud. Physical addresses can be set from 01 to 99.
orks
LonW
LonWorks is an open protocol that requires the use of Echelon’s Neuron microprocessor to encode and decode
the LonWorks packets. In order to reduce the cost of adding that hardware on every module, a separate LonWorks Option Card (LON--OC) was designed to connect to the RTU-- MP.
This accessory card is needed for LonWorks and has to be ordered and connected using the ribbon cable to plug J15. The RTU--MP’s baud rate must be set to 38.4k to communicate with the LON--OC. The address switches (SW1 & SW2) are not used with LonWorks.
Access
Local
BACview
The BACview
6
Handheld
6
is a keypad/display interface used to connect to the RTU-- MP to access the control information, read sensor values, and test the RTU, see Fig. 64. This is an accessory interface that does not come with the MP controller and can only be used at the unit. Connect the
6
BACview
to the RTU--MP’s J12 local access port. There are 2 password protected levels in the display (User and Admin). The user password is defaulte d to 0000 but can be changed. The Admin password is 1111 and cannot be changed. There is a 10 minute auto logout if a screen is left idle. Contact your Bryant applications engineer for details on navigation and screen content.
Virtual BACview
Virtual BACview is a freeware computer program that
6
functions as the BACview
Handheld. The USB Link interface (USB--L) is required to connect a computer to the RTU--MP board. The link cable connects a USB port to the J12 local access port. This program functions and operates identical to the handheld.
548J
SW3 Protocol Selection
PROTOCOL DS8 DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1 BACnet MS/TP
(Master)
Modbus (Slave)
N2 (Slave)
LonWorks Unused ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
NOTE: DS = Dip Switch BACnet MS/TP SW3 example shown
BAUD RATE DS2 DS1
9600 OFF OFF 19,200 ON OFF 38,400 OFF ON 76,800 ON ON
Unused OFF OFF OFF ON OFF Select Baud Select Baud
Unused OFF OFF ON ON OFF Select Baud Select Baud
Unused OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
Baud Rate Selections
Fig. 63 -- RTU--MP SW3 Dip Switch Setti ngs
C07166
41
548J
Fig. 64 -- BACview6Handheld Connections
RTU--MP Troubleshooting
Communication LEDs
The LEDs on the RTU--MP (see Fig. 46) indicate if the controller is speaking to the devices on the network. The LEDs should reflect communicati on traffic based on t he
The LEDs on the RTU --- MP show the status of certain functions
C07170
baud rate set. The higher the baud rate the more solid the LEDs will appear. See Table 16 for further information.
Table 16 – RTU--MP LEDs
If this LED is on...
Power The RTU MP has power
Rx The RTU MP is receiving data from the network segment
Tx The RTU MP is transmitting data over the network segment
DO# The digital output is active
The Run and Error LEDs indicate control module and network status
If Run LED shows...
2 flashes per second Off Normal
2 flashes per second
2 flashes per second
2 flashes per second
2 flashes per second On
5 flashes per second On Exec start---up aborted, Boot is running
5 flashes per second Off
7 flashes per second
14 flashes per second
On On
Status is...
And Error LED shows... Status is...
2flashes, alternating with Run LED
3flashes, then off
4flashes, then pause
7 flashes per second, alternating with Run LED
14 flashes per second, alternating with Run LED
Five minute auto ---restart delay after system error
Control module has just been formatted
Two or more devices on this network havethesameARC156networkaddress
Exec halted after frequent system errors or control programs halted
Firmware transfer in progress, Boot is running
Ten second recovery period after brownout
Brownout
Failure. Try the following solutions:
S Turn the RTU --- MP off, then on. S F o r m a t th e R TU --- M P . S Download memory to the RTU ---MP. S Replace the RTU---MP.
42
Table 17 – Troubleshooting Alarms
BACnet
POINT NAME
Safety Chain Alarm safety_chain
Fire Shutdown Alarm fire_alarm
Space Temp Sensor Failure
SAT Sensor Alarm sat_alarm
High Space Temp Alarm spt_hi Alarm Generated Automatic
Low Space Temp Alarm spt_lo Alarm Generated Automatic
High Supply Air Temp sat_hi Alarm Generated Automatic
Low Supply Air Temp sat_lo Alarm Generated Automatic
Supply Fan Failed to Start
Supply Fan in Hand sf_hand
Compressor Safety Alarm
Setpoint Slider Alarm slide_alarm
Dirty Filter Alarm filter Alarm Generated
Switch Configuration Alarm
Misconfigured Analog Input
OAT Sensor Alarm oat_alarm
Space RH Sensor Alarm sprh_alarm
Outdoor RH Sensor Alarm
High Space Humidity sprh_hi Alarm Generated Automatic
Low Space Humidity sprh_lo Alarm Generated Automatic IRH is less then 35% for more then 10 minutes.
IAQ Sensor Alarm iaq_alarm
OAQ Sensor Alarm oaq_alarm
High Carbon Dioxide Level
Supply Fan Runtime Alarm
Compressor 1 Runtime Alarm
Compressor 2 Runtime Alarm
OBJECT
NAME
spt_alarm
sf_fail
dx_compstat Alarm Generated Automatic Compressor would not start.
sw_cfg_alarm
an_cfg_alarm
oarh_alarm Alarm Generated Automatic
co2_hi Alarm Generated Automatic CO2 reading is above 1200ppm.
sf_rntm Alarm Generated
dx1_rntm Alarm Generated
dx2_rntm Alarm Generated
ACTION TAKEN BY
CONTROL
Alarm Generated Immediate Shutdown
Alarm Generated Immediate Shutdown
Alarm Generated Immediate Shutdown
Alarm Generated Immediate Shutdown
Alarm Generated Immediately disable Operation
Alarm Generated Ramp down Operations
Alarm Generated Offset set to zero
Alarm Generated Disable misconfigured switch functions
Alarm Generated Disable 4 selectable analog inputs
Alarm Generated Economizer and Low ambient DX cooling lockout disabled.
Alarm Generated Dehumidification disabled
Alarm Generated Disables IAQ Operation Economizer moves to minimum position
Alarm Generated Set OAQ to 400
RESET
METHOD
Automatic Over load Indoor Fan or Electric Heater overheat.
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic Bad Fan Status Switch, Configuration incorrect.
Automatic
Automatic/ reset timer when configured with or without switch
Configure correctly
Configure correctly
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
clear the timer
clear the timer
clear the timer
Smoke detected by smoke detector or configuration incorrect
Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor caused by wiring error or loose connection.
Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor caused by wiring error or loose connection.
Thespacetemperaturehasrisenabovethecool setpoint by more than the desired amount.
The space temperature has dropped below the heat setpoint by more than the desired amount.
SAT is greater then 160 degrees for more than 5 minutes.
Thesupplyairtemperatureisbelow35_Ffor more than 5 minutes.
Tripped Circuit Breaker, Broken belt, Bad indoor fan motor, Configuration incorrect, Bad fan status switch.
STOsensorisopenorshortedformorethen5 seconds.
Dirty Filter, supply fan run time exceeded, filter switch configuration wrong.
More than one binary input is configured for the same purpose. More then one discrete input is configured to provide the same function.
More then one analog input is configured to provide the same function.
Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor caused by wiring error or loose connection.
Sensor reading is out of range. Bad sensor, bad wiring, or sensor configured incorrectly.
Sensor reading is out of range. Bad sensor, bad wiring, or sensor configured incorrectly.
IRH is greater then 70% for more then 10 minutes.
Sensor reading is out of range. Bad sensor, bad wiring, or sensor configured incorrectly.
Sensor reading is out of range. Bad sensor, bad wiring, or sensor configured incorrectly.
Supply fan run time exceeded user defined limit.
Compressor run time limit is exceeded.
Compressor run time limit is exceeded.
PROBABLE CAUSE
548J
43
Alarms
Alarms can be checked through the network and/or the local access. All the alarms are listed in Table 17 with name, object name, action taken by control, reset method, and probable cause. There are help screens for each alarm on the local access display and listed in Form 48--50H--T--2T, Appendix A: Help Screens. Some alarms are explained in detail below.
Safety Chain
This alarm occurs immediately if the supply--fan internal overload trips or if an electric--heat limit switch trips. The Unit Status will be Shutdown and the System Mode will be Disable. When this happens CTB (R terminal) will not have 24 VAC, but the RTU--MP board will still be powered. All unit operations stop immediately and will not restart until the alarm automatically clears. There are no configurations for this alarm; it is all based on i nternal
548J
wiring. This alarm will never occur if Fire Shutdown Alarm is active.
Fire Shutdown
This alarm occurs immediately when the smoke detector senses smoke. The Unit Status will be Shutdown and the System Mode will be Disable. All unit operations stop immediately and will not restart until the alarm automatically clears. If there is not a smoke detector installed or the smoke detector did not trip, check input configurations.
Space Temp Sensor Failur
This alarm occurs if the space sensor wired to the RTU--MP is disconnected or shorted for more then 10 seconds. When this occurs the Unit Status will be Shutdown and the System Mode will be Run. Sensor, sensor connections, wiring, board connection, and configurations should be checked for faults or errors. Alarm will reset automatically when cause is fixed.
SA T Sensor
This alarm occurs immediately when the supply air temperature sensor wired to the RTU-- MP is disconnected or shorted. When this occurs the Unit Status will be Shutdown and the System Mode will be Run. Sensor, sensor connections, wiring, board connection, and configurations should be checked for faults or errors. Alarm will reset automatically when cause is fixed.
Switch Configuration
This occurs if more than one binary input (inputs 3, 5, 8, and 9) is configured for the same function. When this happens the two inputs (or more) c onfigured wrong will be disabled as an inputs. This alarm will automatically be cleared when configuration is corrected.
An example of this would be: Input 3 = Compressor Safety, input 5 = Fan Status, input 8 = Fan Status, and input 9 = Humidistat; the alarm would be act ive, unit would run, compressor safety and humidistat would function normally, and Fan Status (inputs 5 & 8) will be interpreted as “No Function.”
Alarm
Alarm
e
Alarm
Alarm
Misconfigured Analog
Input
This occurs if more than one analog input (inputs 1 & 2) is configured for the same sensor. When this happens the two inputs will be disabl ed as inputs. This alarm will automatically be cleared when configuration is corrected.
An example of this would be: Input 1 = IAQ Sensor, input 2 = IAQ Sensor; the alarm would be active, unit would run, but the IAQ Sensor (inputs 1 & 2) will be interpreted as “No Funct ion.”
Third Party
Networking
Third party communication and networking troubleshooting should be done by or with assistance from the front end 3rd party te chnician. A Module Status Report (Modstat) (see Fig. 65) can be run from the
6
BACview
, see Table 18 to perform. This lists information about the board status and networking state. For basic troubleshooting, see Table 19. Refer to the RTU--MP 3rd Party Integration Guide for additional information.
BACnet MS/TP
1. Verify that the BAS and controller are both set to speak the BACnet MS/TP protocol. The protocol of the controller is set via SW3 (switches 3, 4, 5, and 6). The protocol can also be verified by getting a Modstat of the controller through the BACview. Hit the “FN” key and the “.” key at the same time to pull up a Modstat. Scroll to the bottom of the page and there is a section entitled “Network Communications.” The active protocol and baud rate will be shown in this section.
2. Verify that the BAS and controller are set for the same baud rate. The baud rate of the controller is set via SW3 (switches 1 and 2). The baud rate can also be verified via the BACview by obtaining a Modstat. (See Fig. 65.)
3. Verify that the BAS is configured to speak 2 -- wire EIA--485 to the controller. The BAS may have to configure jumper or DIP switches on their end.
4. Verify that the BAS and the controller have the same communication settings (8 data bits, No Parity, and 1 stop bit).
5. Verify that the controller has a unique MAC address on the MS/TP bus. The controller’s MS/TP MAC address is set by its rotary address switches.
6. Verify proper wiring between the BAS and the controller.
7. Verify that the BAS is reading or writing to the proper BACnet objects in the controller. Download the latest points list for the controller to verify.
8. Verify that the BAS is sending his requests to the proper MS/TP MAC address of our controller.
9. Present the BAS company with a copy of our controller’s BACnet PICS so that they know which BACnet commands are supported. See below.
10. In certain situations, it may be necessary to tweak the MS/TP Protocol timing settings through the BACview tweaked:
6
. There are two settings that may be
44
S Max Masters: Defines the highest MS/TP Master MAC
address on this MS/TP network. For example, if there are 3 master nodes on an MS/TP network, and their MAC addresses are 1, 8, and 16, then Max Masters would be set to 16 (since this is the highest MS/TP MAC address on the network). This property optimizes MS/TP network communications by preventing token passes and “poll for master” requests to non--existent Master nodes (i.e., in the above example, MAC address 16 would know to pass the token back to MAC address 1 instead of count ing up to MAC address 127). Each MS/TP master node on the network must have their Max Masters set to this same value. The default is 127.
Device Instance: 0160001
S MaxInfo Frames: This property defines the maximum
number of responses that will be sent whe n our controller gets the token. A valid number is any positive integer. The default is 10 and should be ideal for the majority of applications. In cases where the controller is the target of many requests, this number could be increased as high as 100 or 200.
NOTE: MS/TP networks can be comprised of both Master and Slave nodes. V alid MAC addresses for Master nodes are 0 -- 127 and valid addresses for Slave nodes are 0 -- 254.
NOTE: See RTU--MP 3rd Party Integration Guide for Protocol Maps.
1 PRGs loaded. 1 PRGs running.
Module status: Firmware sections validated in flash memory ============================================ Boot16-H - v2.06:001 Jun 19 2007 RTU-MP DRIVER - v2.09:050 Jun 26 2007
Reset counters: 11 Power failures 0 Brownouts 18 Commanded warm boots 22 Commanded cold boots 0 System errors 0 Watchdog timeouts
System error message history: Type Specific Warning message history: Information message history: POWERUP: BACnet reinitialize warmstart 06/29/07 10:49:40 Menu file not found. 06/29/07 10:48:35
ARC156 reconfigurations during the last hour (cleared upon reset):
Total ....................... 0
Initiated by this node ...... 0
548J
Core board hardware: Type=147, board=34, manufactured on 05/14/2007, S/N 21A740188N RAM: 1024 kBytes; FLASH: 1024 kBytes, type = 3 Base board hardware: Type=147, board=71, manufactured on 05/14/2007, S/N RMP750037N
Largest free heap space = 65536.
Database size = 742082 , used = 352162, free = 389920.
Raw physical switches: 0x01280000
Module Communications: Network Protocol=BACnet MSTP Master Network Baud Rate=9600 bps
Fig. 65 -- Module Status Report (Modstat) Example
45
C07195
Table 18 – Manufacture Date
When troubleshooting, you may need to know a control module’s manufacture date.
Obtain the manufacture date from a...
Module status report (modstat) To obtain a modstat with BACview6:
Sticker on the back of the main control module board “Serial No: RMPYMxxxxN” (Bar Coded & Typed Number)
548J
Problem Possible cause Corrective action
No communication with 3rd party vendor
Notes
1. Press Function (FN) key and hold.
2. Then press period (.)
3. Release both buttons. ThereportshowsthedateunderMain board hardware.
The serial numbers are unique and contain embedded information:
“RMP” --- These first three digits are unique to RTU --- MP and are used as an identifier.
“YM” --- These two digits identify the last digit of the year and month (in hex, A=10/Oct)
xxxx” --- These four digits represent the sequential number of units produced for a given
“N” --- This final digit represents the decade and toggles between “N” and “M” every
of manufacture. “74” would represent a date of manufacture of “April 2007”.
product for the mentioned manufacturing time period.
ten years.
Table 19 – Basic Protocol Troubleshooting
Incorrect settings on SW1, SW2 and SW3 Verify and correct switch settings. Cycle
RS485 Port has no voltage output
(check with RTU---MP disconnected from RS485 communication bus):
• Bacnet @ 9600/19.2K --- .01 to .045vdc
• Bacnet @ 38.4K --- .06 to .09vdc
• Bacnet @ 76.8K --- .1vdc
• Modbus @ 9600 --- 76.8K --- .124vdc
• N2 @ 9600 --- .124vdc
• LON @ 9600 --- .124vdc
Verify devices are daisy chained and repeaters and bias terminators are correctly installed.
powertoRTU---MPafterchangingswitch settings.
Verify RTU--- MP has correct power supply.
Possible bad driver on board.
Check RS485 bus for external voltage, shorts or grounding before reconnecting to the bus.
Check 3rd party vendor RS485 communication wiring guidelines and troubleshooting procedures.
Table 20 – Modbus Exception Codes that May be
Returned From This Controller
CODE NAME MEANING
The Modbus function code used
01 Illegal Function
02 Illegal Data Address
04 SlaveDeviceFailure
in the query is not supported by the controller.
The register address used in the query is not supported by the controller.
The Modbus Master has attempted to write to a non--- existent register or a read---only register in the controller.
Modbus
1. Verify that the BAS and controller are both set to speak the Modbus RTU protocol. The protocol of the controller is set via SW3 (switches 3, 4, 5, and 6). The protocol can also be verified by getting a Modstat of the controller through the BACview. Hit the “FN” key and the “.” key at the same time to pull up a Modstat. Scroll to the bottom of the page and there is a section entitled “Network Communications.” The active protocol and baud rate will be shown in this section.
2. Verify that the BAS and controller are set for the same baud rate. The baud rate of the controller is set via SW3 (switches 1 and 2). The baud rate can also
be verified via the BACview by obtaining a Modstat (see above).
3. Verify that the BAS is configured to speak 2 -- wire EIA--485 to the controller. The BAS may have to configure jumper or DIP switches on their end.
4. Verify that the BAS and the controller have the same communication settings (8 data bits, No Parity, and 1 stop bit).
5. Verify that the controller has a unique Modbus slave address. The controller’s Modbus slave address is set by its rotary address switches.
6. Verify that the BAS is using the proper Modbus function codes to access data from our controller. Supported function codes are shown above.
7. Verify proper wiring between the BAS and the controller.
8. Verify that the BAS is reading or writing to the proper Modbus register numbers on the controller. Download the latest points list for the controller to verify.
9. Verify that the BAS is sending his requests to the proper slave address of our controller.
NOTE: See RTU--MP 3rd Party Integration Guide (or alternatively Form 48--50H--T--1T, Appendix) for Modbus Protocol Conformance Statement.
46
N2
A
1. Verify that the BAS and controller are both set to speak the N2 protocol. The protocol of the controller is set via SW3 (switches 3, 4, 5, and 6). The protocol can also be verified by getting a Modstat of the controller through the BACview. Hit t he “FN” key and the “.” key at the same time to pull up a Modstat. Scroll to the bottom of the page and there is a section entitled “Network Communications.” The active protocol and baud rate will be shown in this section.
2. Verify that the BAS and controller are set for 9600 baud. The baud rate of the controller is set via SW3 (switches 1 and 2). The baud rate can also be verified via the BACview by obtaining a Modstat (see above).
3. Verify that the BAS is configured to speak 2 -- wire EIA--485 to the controller. The BAS may have to configure jumper or DIP switches on their end.
4. Verify that the BAS and the controller have the same communication settings (8 data bits, No Parity, and 1 stop bit).
5. Verify that the controller has a unique N2 slave address on the N2 bus. The controller’s N2 slave address is set by its rotary address switches.
6. Verify proper wiring between the BAS and the controller.
7. Verify that the BAS is reading or writing to the proper network point addresses on the controller. Download the latest points list for the controller to verify.
8. Verify that the BAS is sending his requests to the proper slave address of our controller.
NOTE: See RTU--MP 3rd Party Integration Guide (or alternatively Form 48--50H--T--1T Appendix) for N2 Protocol Conformance Statement.
ECONOMIZER SYSTEMS
The 548J units may be equipped with a factory--installed or accessory (field--installed) economizer system. Two types are available: with a logic control system (EconoMi$er IV) and without a control system (EconoMi$er2). See Fig. 66 and Fig. 67 for component locations on each type. See Fig. 68 and Fig. 69 for economizer section wiring diagrams.
Both economizers use direct-- drive damper actuators.
ECONOMI$ER IV CONTROLLER
WIRING HARNESS
CTUATOR
Fig. 66 -- EconoMi$er IV Component Locations
ECONOMI$ER2 PLUG
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
LOW AMBIENT SENSOR
OUTDOOR AIR HOOD
HOOD SHIPPING BRACKET
C06021
548J
BAROMETRIC RELIEF DAMPER
GEAR DRIVEN DAMPER
C06022
Fig. 67 -- EconoMi$er2 Component Loc ations
47
548J
Economizer 2 Position Damper
Unit Without Economizer or 2 Position Damper
C08631
Fig. 68 -- EconoMi$er IV Wiring
BLACK
BLUE
500 OHM RESISTOR
VIOLET
NOTE 1
NOTE 3
50HJ540573
ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY
RUN
DIRECT DRIVE
ACTUATOR
OAT SENSOR
4-20mA SIGNAL
PINK
YELLOW
WHITE
NOTES:
1. Switch on actuator must be in run position for economizer to operate.
2. PremierLink™ control requires that the standard 50HJ540569 outside-air sensor be replaced by either the CROASENR001A00 dry bulb sen sor or HH57A077 enthalpy sensor.
3. 50HJ540573 actuator consists of the 50HJ540567 actuator and a harness with 500-ohm resistor.
4
TRANSFORMER GROUND
3
5
2
8
6
7
RED
24 VAC
1
10
11
9
12
ECONOMISER2 PLUG
4-20 mA TO J9 ON PremierLink BOARD
C08310
Fig. 69 -- EconoMi$er2 with 4 to 20 mA Control Wiring
48
Table 21 – EconoMi$er IV Input/Output Logic
INPUTS OUTPUTS
Demand Control
Ventilation (DCV)
Below set
(DCV LED Off)
Above set
(DCV LED On)
* For single enthalpy control, the module compares outdoor enthalpy to the ABCD setpoint. † Power at N terminal determines Occupied/Unoccupied setting: 24 vac (Occupied), no power (Unoccupied). ** Modulation is based on the supply-air sensor signal. †† Modulation is based on the DCV signal. *** Modulation is based on the greater of DCV and supply-air sensor signals, between minimum position and either maximum position (DCV)
or fully open (supply-air signal).
††† Modulation is based on the greater of DCV and supply-air sensor signals, between closed and either maximum position (DCV) or fully
open (supply-air signal).
(Free Cooling LED Off)
(Free Cooling LED On)
(Free Cooling LED Off)
(Free Cooling LED On)
Enthalpy*
Outdoor Return
High
Low
High
Low
Low
High
Low
High
Y1 Y2
On On On On
Off Off Off Off On On On Off On Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Minimum position Closed On On On On On Off On Off Off Off Off Off On On On Off
Off Off Off Off
Compressor NTerminal†
Stage1Stage
2
Modulating** (between min.
Modulating†† (between min.
Occupied Unoccupied
Damper
Minimum position ClosedOn Off On Off
position and full-open)
position and DCV
maximum)
Modulating*** Modulating†††On Off Off Off
Modulating** (between
closed and full-open)
Modulating†† (between
closed and DCV
maximum)
548J
Fig. 70 -- EconoMi$er IV Functional View
EconoMi$er IV
Table 21 provides a summary of EconoMi$er IV. Troubleshooting instructions are enclosed.
A functional view of the EconoMi$er is shown in Fig. 70. Typical settings, sensor ranges, and jumper positions are also shown.
EconoMi$er IV Standard
Outdoor Air Temperature (OAT) Sensor
The outdoor air temperature sensor (HH57AC074) is a 10 to 20 mA device used to measure the outdoor-air
Sensors
C06053
temperature. The outdoor-air temperature is used to determine when the EconoMi$er IV can be used for free cooling. The sensor is factory-installed on the EconoMi$er IV in the outdoor airstream. (See Fig. 66.) The operat ing range of temperature measurement is 40_ to 100_F(4_ to 38_C). See Fig. 73.
Supply Air Temperature (SAT) Sensor
The supply air temperature sensor is a 3 K thermistor located at the inlet of t he indoor fan. (See Fig. 71.) This sensor is factory installed. The operating range of temperature measurement is 0° to 158_F(--18_ to 70_C). See Table 15 for sensor temperature/resistance values.
49
SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR MOUNTING LOCATION
SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Fig. 71 -- Supply Air Sensor Location
The temperature sensor looks like an eyelet terminal with wires running to it. The sensor is located in the “crimp end” and is sealed from moisture.
Outdoor Air Lockout Sensor
548J
The EconoMi$er IV is equipped with an ambient temperature lockout switch located in the outdoor airstream which is used to lock out the compressors below a42_F(6_C) ambient temperature. (See Fig. 66. )
EconoMi$er IV Control
IMPORTANT: The optional EconoMi$er2 does not include
Modes
a controller. The EconoMi$er2 is operated by a 4 to 20 mA signal from an existing field-supplied controller. See Fig. 69 for wiring information.
Determine the EconoMi$er IV control mode before set up of the control. Some modes of operation may require different sensors. (See Table 22.) The EconoMi$er IV is supplied from the factory with a supply--air temperature sensor and an outdoor-- air temperat ure sensor. This allows for operation of the EconoMi$er IV with outdoor air dry bulb changeover control. Additional accessories can be added to allow for different types of changeover control and operation of the EconoMi$er IV and unit.
Table 22 – EconoMi$er IV Sensor Usage
ECONOMI$ER IV WITH OUTDOOR AIR DRY
APPLICATION
Outdoor Air
Dry Bulb
Differential
Dry Bulb
Single Enthalpy HH57AC078
Differential
Enthalpy
CO2for DCV
Control using a
Wall-Mounted
CO
Sensor
2
CO2for DCV
Control using a
Duct-Mounted
CO
Sensor
2
* CRENTDIF004A00 and CRTEMPSN002A00 accessories are
used on many different base units. As such, these kits may
contain parts that will not be needed for installation. † 33ZCSENCO2 is an accessory CO ** 33ZCASPCO2 is an accessory aspirator box required for
duct-mounted applications. †† CRCBDIOX005A00 is an accessory that contains both
33ZCSENCO2 and 33ZCASPCO2 accessories.
None. The outdoor air dry bulb sensor is
HH57AC078 and CRENTDIF004A00*
33ZCSENCO2† and
33ZCASPCO2**OR
BULB SENSOR
Accessories Required
factory installed.
CRTEMPSN002A00*
33ZCSENCO2
CRCBDIOX005A00††
sensor.
2
C06033
Outdoor Dry Bulb Changeover
The standard controller is shipped from the factory configured for outdoor dry bulb changeover cont rol. The outdoor air and supply air temperature sensors are included as standard. For this control mode, the outdoor temperature is compared to an adjustable set point selec ted on the control. If the outdoor-air temperature is above the setpoint, the EconoMi$er IV will adjust the outside air dampers to minimum position. If the outdoor-air temperature is below the setpoint, the position of the outside air dam pers will be controlled to provided free cooling using outdoor air. When in this mode, the LED next to the free cooling setpoint potentiometer will be on. The changeover temperature setpoint is controlled by the free cooling setpoint potentiometer located on the control. (See Fig. 72.) The scale on the potentiometer is A, B, C, and D. See Fig. 73 for the corresponding temperature changeover values.
C06034
Fig. 72 -- EconoMi$er IV Controller Potentiometer
and LED Locations
19
LED ON
17
mA
14
13
12
11
18
16
15
10
9
40
LED OFF
45
D
50
60
55
DEGREES FAHRENHEIT
LED ON
LED OFF
65
C
LED ON
B
LED ON
A
LED OFF
100
90
95
85
80
C06035
70
LED OFF
75
Fig. 73 -- Outside Air Temperature Changeover
Setpoints
50
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
0.13 0.20 0.22 0.25 0. 30 0. 35 0.40 0.45 0.50
FLOW IN CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE (cfm)
STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)
C06031
Fig. 74 -- Outdoor--Air Damper Leakage
Differential Dry Bulb Control
For differential dry bulb control the standard outdoor dry bulb sensor is used in conjunction with an additional accessory dry bulb sensor (part number CRTEMPSN002A00). The accessory sensor must be mounted in the return airstream. (See Fig. 75.) Wiring is provided in the EconoMi$er IV wiring harness.
Outdoor Enthalpy Changeover
For enthalpy control, accessory enthalpy sensor (part number HH57AC078) is required. Replace the standard outdoor dry bulb temperature sensor with the accessory enthalpy sensor in the sam e mounting location. (See Fig. 66.) When the outdoor air enthalpy rises above the outdoor enthalpy changeover setpoint, the outdoor-air damper moves to its minimum position. The outdoor enthalpy changeover setpoint is set with the outdoor enthalpy setpoint potentiometer on the EconoMi$er IV
controller. The setpoints are A, B, C, and D. (See Fig. 76.) The factory-installed 620-ohm jumper must be in place across terminals S
and SR+ on the EconoMi$er IV
R
controller (see Fig. 68). In this mode of operation, the outdoor-air temperature is
compared to the return-air temperature and the lower temperature airstream is used for cooling. When using this mode of change over control, turn the enthalpy setpoint potentiometer fully clockwise to the D setting. (See Fig. 72.)
ECONOMI$ERIV CONTROLLER
ECONOMI$ERIV
GROMMET
RETURN AIR SENSOR
RETURN DUCT (FIELD-PROVIDED)
C07085
Fig. 75 -- Return Air Temperature or Enthalpy Sensor
Mounting Location
548J
CONTROL
CURVE
4
1
2
1
A B C D
6
1
(29)90(32)95(35)
46
8
3
A
(18)
4
4
80
42
(21)
1
(27)
75
(24)
70
0
0
0
9
80
70
0
6
50
A
B
C
D
70
75
80
(24)
(21)
(27)
(29)90(32)95(35)
40
65
65
(18)
CONTROL POINT
deg. F (deg. C)
APPROX.
AT 50% RH
73 (23) 70 (21) 67 (19) 63 (17)
28
ENTHALPY BTU PER POUND DRY AIR
26
4
2
2
2
0
2
8
1
45
(7)
40
(4)
35
(2)
35
40
45
(2)
(4)
(7)
APPROXIMATE DRY BULB TEMPERATURE--degrees F (degrees C)
6
3
4
3
32
30
60
(16)
55
(13)
B
50
C
(10)
D
50
55
60
(10)
(13)
(16)
Fig. 76 -- Enthalpy Changeover Setpoints
85
RELATIVE HUMIDITY (%)
0
4
30
20
85
100 (38)
100 (38)
105
110
(41)
(43)
0
1
HIGH LIMIT
110 (43)
CURVE
105 (41)
C06037
51
N1
P1
T1
AQ1
SO+
SR+
CO SENSOR MAX RANGE SETTING
TR1
EXH
2V 10V
EXH
Open
2V 10V
DCV
2V 10V
Free Cool
B
A
DCV
DCV
C
D
Set
Min Pos
Max
Set
N
P
T
AQ
SO
SR
TR
24
24 Vac
Va c
COM
HOT
_
+
12
5
4
3
EF1
EF
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
RANGE CONFIGURATION (ppm)
0
Fig. 78 -- CO2Sensor Maximum Range Settings
2
800 ppm 900 ppm 1000 ppm 1100 ppm
2345678
DAMPER VOLTAGE FOR MAX VENTILATION RATE
C06039
548J
Fig. 77 -- EconoMi$er IV Control
Differential Enthalpy Control
For differential enthalpy control, the EconoMi$er IV controller uses two enthalpy sensors (HH57AC078 and CRENTDIF004A00), one in t he outside air and one in the return air duct. The EconoMi$er IV c ontroller compares the outdoor air enthalpy to the return air enthalpy to determine EconoMi$er IV use. The controller selects the lower enthalpy air (return or outdoor) for cooling. For example, whe n the outdoor air has a lower enthalpy than the return air, the EconoMi$er IV opens to bring in outdoor air for free cooling.
Replace the standard outside air dry bulb temperature sensor with the accessory enthalpy sensor in the same mounting location. (See Fig. 66.) Mount the return air enthalpy sensor in the return air duct. (See Fig. 75.) Wiring is provided in the EconoMi$er IV wiring harness. (See Fig. 66.) The outdoor enthalpy changeover setpoint is set with the outdoor enthalpy setpoint potentiometer on the EconoMi$er IV controller. When using this mode of changeover control, turn the enthalpy setpoint potentiometer fully clockwise to the D setting.
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Sensor Input
The IAQ input can be used for demand control ventilation control based on the level of CO
measured in the space
2
or return air duct. Mount the accessory IAQ sensor according to
manufacturer specifications. The IAQ sensor should be wired to the AQ and AQ1 terminals of the controller. Adjust the DCV potentiometers to correspond to the DCV voltage output of the indoor air quality sensor at the user-determined setpoint. (See Fig. 78.)
C06038
If a separate field-supplied transformer is used to power the IAQ sensor, the sensor must not be grounded or the EconoMi$er IV control board will be damaged.
When using demand ventilation, the minimum damper position represents the minimum ventilation position for VOC (volatile organic compounds) ventilation requirements. The maximum demand ventilation position is used for fully occupied ventilation.
When demand ventilation control is not being used, the minimum position potentiometer should be used to set the occupied ventilation position. The maximum demand ventilation position should be turned fully clockwise.
Exhaust Setpoint Adjustment
The exhaust setpoint will determine when the exhaust fan runs based on damper position (if accessory power exhaust is installed). The setpoint is modified with the Exhaust Fan Setpoint (EXH SET) potentiometer. (See Fig. 72.) The setpoint represents the damper position above which the exhaust fans will be turned on. When there is a call for exhaust, the EconoMi$er IV controller provides a 45 ±15 second delay before exhaust fan activation to allow the dampers to open. This delay allows the damper to reach the appropriate position to avoid unnecessary fan overload.
Minimum Position Control
There is a minimum damper position potentiometer on the EconoMi$er IV controller. (See Fig. 72.) The minimum damper position maintains the minimum airflow into the building during the occupied period.
When using demand ventilation, the minimum damper position represents the minimum ventilation position for VOC (volatile organic compound) ventilation requirements. The maximum demand ventilation position is used for fully occupied ventilation.
When demand ventilation control is not being used, the minimum position potentiometer should be used to set the occupied ventilation position. The maximum demand ventilation position should be turned fully clockwise.
Adjust the minimum position potentiometer to allow the minimum amount of outdoor air, as required by local codes, to enter the building. Make minimum position adjustments with at least 10_F temperature difference between the outdoor and return-air t emperatures.
52
To determine the minimum position setting, perform the following procedure:
1. Calculate the appropriate mixed air temperature using the following formula:
OA
(T
Ox
100 100
)+(T
RA
x
R
)=T
M
TO= Outdoor-Air Temperature OA = Perce nt of Outdoor Air T
= Return-Air Temperature
R
RA = Percent of Return Air T
= Mixed-Air Temperature
M
As an example , if local codes require 10% outdoor air during occupied conditions, outdoor-air temperature is 60_F, and return-air temperature is 75_F.
(60 x .10) + (75 x .90) = 73.5_F
2. Disconnect the supply air sensor from terminals T and T1.
3. Ensure that the factory-installed jumper is in place across terminals P and P1. If remote damper positioning is being used, make sure that the terminals are wired according to Fig. 68 and that the minimum position potentiometer is turned fully clockwise.
4. Connect 24 vac across termina ls TR and TR1.
5. Carefully adjust the minimum position potentiometer until the measured mixed air temperature matches the calculated value.
6. Reconnect the supply air sensor to terminals T and T1.
Remote control of the EconoMi$er IV damper is desirable when requiring additional temporary ventilation. If a field-supplied remote potentiometer (Honeywell part number S963B1128) is wired to the EconoMi$er IV controller, the minimum position of the damper can be controlled from a remote location.
To control the minimum damper position remotely, remove the factory-installed jumper on the P and P1 terminals on the EconoMi$e r IV controller. Wire the field-supplied potentiometer to the P and P1 terminals on the EconoMi$er IV controller. (See Fig. 77.)
Damper Movement
Damper movement from full open to full closed (or vice
1
versa) takes 2
/2minutes.
Thermostats
The EconoMi$er IV control works with conventional thermostats that have a Y1 (cool stage 1), Y2 (cool stage
2), W1 (heat stage 1), W2 (heat stage 2), and G (fan). The EconoMi$er IV control does not support space temperature sensors . Connections are made at the thermostat terminal connection board located in the main control box.
Occupancy Control
The factory default configuration for the EconoMi$er IV control is occupied mode. Occupie d status is provided by the black jumper from terminal TR to terminal N. When unoccupied mode is desired, i nstall a field --supplied
timeclock function in place of the jumper between TR and N. When the timeclock contacts are closed, the EconoMi$er IV control will be in occupied mode. When the timeclock contacts are open (removing the 24--v signal from terminal N), the EconoMi$er IV will be in unoccupied mode.
Demand Control Ventilation (DCV)
When using the EconoMi$er IV for demand controlled ventilation, there are some equipment selection criteria which should be considered. When selecting the heat capacity and cool capacity of the equipment, the maximum ventilation rate must be evaluated for design conditions. The maximum damper position must be calculated to provide the desired fresh air.
Typically the maximum ventilation rate will be about 5 to 10% more than the typical cfm required per person, using normal outside air design criteria.
A proportional anticipatory strategy should be taken with the following conditions: a zone wit h a large area, varied occupancy, and equipment that cannot exceed the required ventilation rate at design conditions. Exceeding the required ventilation rate means the equipment can condition air at a maximum ventilation rate that is greater than the required ventilation rate for maximum occupancy. A proportional-anticipatory strategy will cause the fresh air supplied to increase as the room CO increases even though the CO reached. By the time the CO
setpoint has not been
2
level reaches the setpoint,
2
2
level
the damper will be at maximum ventilation and should maintain the setpoint.
In order to have the CO
sensor control the economizer
2
damper in this manner, first determine the damper voltage output for minimum or base ventilation. Base ventilation is the ventilation required to remove contaminants during unoccupied periods. The following equation may be used to determine the percent of outside air entering the building for a given damper position. For best results there should be at least a 10 degree difference in outside and return-air temperatures.
OA
(T
Ox
100 100
)+(T
RA
x
R
)=T
M
TO= Outdoor-Air Temperature OA = Perce nt of Outdoor Air T
= Return-Air Temperature
R
RA = Percent of Return Air T
= Mixed-Air Temperature
M
Once base ventilation has been determined, set the minimum damper position potentiometer to the correct position.
The same equation can be used to determine the occupied or maximum ventilation rate to the building. For example, an output of 3.6 volts to the actuator provides a base ventilation rate of 5% and an output of 6.7 volts provides the maximum ventilation rate of 20% (or base plus 15 cfm per person). Use Fig. 78 to determine the maximum setting of the CO
sensor. For example, an 1100 ppm
2
setpoint relates to a 15 cfm per person design. Use the 1100 ppm curve on Fig. 78 to find the point when t he CO sensor output will be 6.7 volt s. Line up the point on the
548J
2
53
graph with the left side of the chart to determine that the range configuration for the CO
sensor should be 1800
2
ppm. The EconoMi$er IV controller will output the 6.7 volts from the CO
sensor to the actuator when the CO
2
concentration in the space is at 1100 ppm. The DCV setpoint may be left at 2 volts since the CO voltage will be ignored by the EconoMi$er IV controller until it rises a bove the 3.6 volt setting of the minimum position potentiometer.
Once the fully occupied damper position has been determined, set the maximum damper demand control ventilation potentiometer to this position. Do not set to the maximum position as this can result in over-ventilation to the space and potential high humidity levels.
Sensor Configuration
CO
2
The CO
548J
can be selected anytime after the sensor is powered up.
sensor has preset standard voltage settings that
2
(See Table 23.) Use setting 1 or 2 for Bryant equipment. (See Table 23.)
1. Press Clear and Mode buttons. Hold at least 5 seconds until the sensor enters the Edit mode.
2. Press Mode twice. The STDSET Menu will appear.
3. Use the Up/Down button to select the preset number. (See Table 23.)
2
sensor
4. Press Enter to lock in the selection.
5. Press Mode to exit and resume normal operation.
2
The custom settings of the CO
sensor can be changed
2
anytime after the sensor is energized. Follow the steps below to change the non-standard settings:
1. Press Clear and Mode buttons. Hold at least 5 seconds until the sensor enters the Edit mode.
2. Press Mode twice. The STDSET Menu will appear.
3. Use the Up/Down button to toggle to the NONSTD menu and press Enter.
4. Use the Up/Down button to toggle through each of the nine variables, starting with Altitude, until the desired setting is reached.
5. Press Mode to move through the variables.
6. Press Enter to lock in the selection, then press Mode to continue to the next variable.
Dehumidification of Fresh Air with DCV (Demand Controlled Ventilation) Control
If normal rooftop heating and cooling operation is not adequate for the outdoor humidity level, an energy recovery unit and/or a dehumidification option should be considered.
SETTING EQUIPMENT OUTPUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
LEGEND: ppm — Parts Per Million
Interface w/Standard
Building Control System
Economizer
Health & Safety Proportional
Parkin g/ Air In ta kes/
Loading Docks
Proportional Any
Proportional Any
Exponential Any
Proportional 15
Proportional 20
Exponential 15
Exponential 20
Proportional
Table 23 – CO2 Sensor Standard Settings
VENTILATION
RATE
(cfm/Person)
ANALOG OUTPUT
0-10V
4-20 mA
2-10V
7-20 mA
0-10V
4-20 mA
0-10V
4-20 mA
0-10V
4-20 mA
0-10V
4-20 mA
0-10V
4-20 mA
0-10V
4-20 mA
0-10V
4-20 mA
CO
CONTROL RANGE
(ppm)
0-2000 1000 50
0-2000 1000 50
0-2000 1100 50
0-1100 1100 50
0- 900 900 50
0-1100 1100 50
0- 900 900 50
0-9999 5000 500
0-2000 700 50
2
OPTIONAL
RELAY SETPOINT
(ppm)
RELAY
HYSTERESIS
(ppm)
54
EconoMi$er IV Preparation
This procedure is used to prepare the E conoMi$er IV for troubleshooting. No troubleshooting or te sting is done by performing the following procedure.
NOTE: This procedure requires a 9--v battery, 1.2 kilo--ohm resistor, and a 5.6 kilo--ohm resistor which are not supplied with the EconoMi$er IV.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to record the positions of all potentiometers before starti ng troubleshooting.
1. Disconnect power at TR and TR1. All LEDs should be off. Exhaust fan contacts should be open.
2. Disconnect device at P and P1.
3. Jumper P to P1.
4. Disconnect wires at T and T1. Place 5.6 kilo--ohm resistor across T and T1.
5. Jumper TR to 1.
6. Jumper TR to N.
7. If connected, remove sensor from terminals SO and + . Connect 1.2 kilo--ohm 4074EJM checkout resistor across terminals SO and +.
8. Put 620--ohm resistor across terminals SR and +.
9. Set minimum position, DCV setpoint, and exhaust potentiometers fully CCW (counterclockwise).
10. Set DCV maximum position potentiometer fully CW (clockwise).
11. Set enthalpy potentiometer to D.
12. Apply power (24 vac) to terminals TR and TR1.
Differential
Enthalpy
To check differential enthalpy:
1. Make sure EconoMi$er IV preparation procedure has been performed.
2. Place 620--ohm resistor across SO and +.
3. Place 1.2 kilo--ohm resistor across SR and +. The Free Cool LED should be lit.
4. Remove 620--ohm resistor across SO and +. The Free Cool LED should turn off.
5. Return EconoMi$er IV settings and wiring to normal after completing troubleshooting.
Enthalpy
Single
To check single enthalpy:
1. Make sure EconoMi$er IV preparation procedure has been performed.
2. Set the enthalpy potentiometer to A (fully CCW). The Free Cool LED should be lit.
3. Set the enthalpy potentiometer to D (fully CW). The Free Cool LED should turn off.
4. Return EconoMi$er IV settings and wiring to normal after completing troubleshooting.
DCV (Demand Controlled Ventilation) and
Power
Exhaust
To check DCV and Power Exhaust:
1. Make sure EconoMi$er IV preparation procedure has been performed.
2. Ensure terminals AQ and AQ1 are open. The LED for both DCV and Exhaust should be off. The actuator should be fully closed.
3. Connect a 9--v battery to AQ (positive node) and AQ1 (negative node). The LED for both DCV and Exhaust should turn on. The actuator should drive to between 90 and 95% open.
4. Turn the Exhaust potentiometer CW until the Exhaust LED turns off. The LED should turn off when the potentiometer is approximately 90%. The actuator should remain in position.
5. Turn the DCV setpoint potentiometer CW until the DCV LED turns off. The DCV LED should turn off when the potentiometer is approximately 9--v. The actuator should drive fully closed.
6. Turn the DCV and Exhaust potentiometers CCW until the Exhaust LED turns on. The exhaust contacts will close 30 to 120 seconds after the Exhaust LED turns on.
7. Return EconoMi$er IV settings and wiring to normal after completing troubleshooting.
DCV Minimum and Maximum
Position
To check the DCV minimum and maximum position:
1. Make sure EconoMi$er IV preparation procedure has been performed.
2. Connect a 9--v battery to AQ (positive node) and AQ1 (negative node). The DCV LED should turn on. The actuator should drive to between 90 and 95% open.
3. Turn the DCV Maximum Position potentiometer to midpoint. The actuator should drive to between 20 and 80% open.
4. Turn the DCV Maximum Position potentiometer to fully CCW. The actuator should drive fully closed.
5. Turn the Minimum Position potentiometer to midpoint. The actuator should drive to between 20 and 80% open.
6. Turn the Minimum Position Potentiometer fully CW. The actuator should drive fully open.
7. Remove the jumper from TR and N. The actuator should drive fully closed.
8. Return EconoMi$er IV settings and wiring to normal after completing troubleshooting.
Supply--Air Sensor
Input
To check supply--air sensor input:
1. Make sure EconoMi$er IV preparation procedure has been performed.
2. Set the Enthal py potentiometer to A. The Free Cool LED turns on. The actuator should drive to between 20 and 80% open.
3. Remove the 5.6 kil o--ohm resistor and jumpe r T to T1. The actuator should drive fully open.
4. Remove the jumper across T and T1. The actuator should drive fully closed.
548J
55
5. Return EconoMi$er IV settings and wiring to normal after completing troubleshooting.
EconoMi$er IV Troubleshooting
Completion
This procedure is used to return the EconoMi$er IV to operation. No troubleshooting or testing is done by performing the following procedure.
1. Disconnect power at TR and TR1.
2. Set enthalpy potentiometer to previous setting.
3. Set DCV maximum position potentiometer to previous setting.
4. Set minimum position, DCV setpoint, and exhaust potentiometers to previous settings.
5. Remove 620--ohm resistor from terminals SR and +.
WIRING DIAGRAMS
6. Remove 1.2 kilo--ohm checkout resistor from terminals SO and +. If used, reconnect sensor from terminals SO and +.
7. Remove jumper from TR to N.
8. Remove jumper from TR to 1.
9. Remove 5.6 kilo--ohm resistor from T and T1. Reconnect wires at T and T1.
10. Remove jumper from P to P1. Reconnect device at P and P1.
11. Apply power (24 vac) to terminals TR and TR1.
548J
See Fig. 79 and Fig. 80 for typical wiring diagrams.
Fig. 79 -- 548J Typical Unit Wiring Diagram -- Power (08D, 208/230--3--60)
56
C09199
C09200
548J
57
Fig. 80 -- 50TCQ Typical Unit Wiring Diagram -- Control (D08, 208/230--3--60)
PRE--START--UP
!
WARNING
!
WARNING
PERSONAL INJURY HAZARD
Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death.
1. Follow recognized safety pra ctices and wear protective goggles when checking or servicing refrigerant system.
2. Do not operate compressor or provide any electric power to unit unless compressor terminal cover is in place and secured.
3. Do not remove compressor terminal cover until all electrical sources are disconnected.
548J
4. Relieve all pressure from system before touching or disturbing anything inside terminal box if refrigerant leak is suspected around compressor terminals.
5. Never attempt to repair soldered connection while refrigerant system is under pressure.
6. Do not use torch to remove any component. System contains oil and refrigerant under pressure. To remove a component, wear protective goggles and proceed as follows:
a. Shut off electrical power to unit.
b. Recover refrigerant to relieve all pressure from
system using both high--pressure and low pressure ports.
c. Cut component connection tubing with tubing
cutter and remove component from unit.
d. Carefully unsweat remaining tubing stubs
when necessary. Oil can ignite when exposed to torch flame.
!
WARNING
ELECTRICAL OPERATION HAZARD
Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death.
The unit must be electrically grounded in accordance with local codes and NEC ANSI/NFPA 70 (American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association.)
Proceed as follows to inspect and prepare the unit for initial start--up:
1. Remove all access panels.
2. Read and follow instructions on all WARNING, CAUTION, and INFORMATION labels attached to, or shipped with, unit.
PERSONAL INJURY AND ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARD
Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death.
Relieve pressure and recover all refrigerant before system repair or final unit disposal.
Wear safety glasses and gloves when handling refrigerants.
Keep torches and other ignition sources away from refrigerants and oils.
3. Make the following inspections: a. Inspect for shipping and handling damages such
as broken lines, loose parts, or disconnected wires, etc.
b. Inspect for oil at all refrigerant tubing
connections and on unit base. Detecting oil generally indicates a refrigerant leak. Leak--test all refrigerant tubing connections using electronic leak detector, halide torch, or liquid--soap solution.
c. Inspect all field--wiring and factory--wiring
connections. Be sure that connections are completed and tight. Be sure that wires are not in contact with refrigerant tubing or sharp edges.
d. Inspect coil fins. If damaged during shipping and
handling, carefully straighten fins with a fin comb.
4. Verify the following conditions: a. Make sure that condenser--fan blade are correctly
positioned in fan orifice. See Condenser--Fan
Adjustment section for more details. b. Make sure that air filter(s) is in place. c. Make sure that condensate drain trap is filled
with water to ensure proper drainage. d. Make sure that all tools and miscellaneous loose
parts have been removed.
START--UP, GENERAL
Unit Preparation
Make sure that unit has been installed in accordance with installation instructions and applicable codes.
Return--Air Filters
Make sure correct filters are installed in unit (see Appendix II -- Physical Data). Do not operate unit without return--air filters.
Outdoor--Air Inlet Screens
Outdoor--air inlet sc reen must be in place before operating unit.
Compressor Mounting
Compressors are internally spring mounted. Do not loosen or remove compressor hold down bolts.
58
Internal Wiring
Check all electrical connections in unit control boxes. Tighten as required.
Refrigerant Service Ports
Each unit system has two1/4” SAE flare (with check valves) service ports: one on the suction line, and one on the compressor discharge line. Be sure that caps on the ports are tight.
Compressor Rotation
On 3--phase units with scroll compressors, it is important to be certain compressor is rotating in the proper direction. To determine whether or not compressor is rotating in the proper direction:
1. Connect service gauges to suction and discharge pressure fittings.
2. Energize the compressor.
3. The suction pressure should drop and the discharge pressure should rise, as is normal on any start--up.
If the suction pressure does not drop and the discharge pressure does not rise to normal levels:
1. Note that the evaporator fan is probably also rotating in the wrong direction.
2. Turn off power to the unit and install lockout tag.
3. Reverse any two of the unit power leads.
4. Re--energize to the compressor. Check pressures.
The suction and discharge pressure levels should now move to their normal start--up levels.
NOTE: When the compressor is rotating in the wrong direction, the unit will make an elevated level of noise and will not provide cooling.
Cooling
Set space thermostat to OFF position. To start unit, turn on main power supply. Set system selector switch at COOL position and fan switch at AUTO. position. Adjust thermostat to a setting below room temperature. Compressor starts on closure of contactor. (08D–09D: Second stage of thermostat will energize Circuit 2 contactor, start Compressor 2.)
Check unit charge. Refer to Refrigerant Charge section.
Reset thermostat at a position above room temperature. Compressor will shut off. Evaporator fa n will shut off after a 30--second delay.
To shut off unit -- set system selector switch at OFF position. Resetting thermostat at a position above room temperature shuts unit off temporarily until space temperature exceeds thermostat setting.
Heating
To start unit, turn on main power supply.
Set system selector switch at HEAT position and set thermostat at a setting above room temperature. Set fan at AUTO position.
First stage of thermostat energizes compressor heating (08D–09D: both compressors will start). Second stage of thermostat energizes electric heaters (if installed). Check heating effects at air supply grille(s).
If electric heaters do not energize, reset limit switch (located on supply--fan scroll) by pressing button locate d between terminals on the switch.
To shut off unit -- set system selector switch at OFF position. Resetting thermostat at a position below room temperature temporarily shuts unit off until space temperature falls below thermostat setting.
Ventilation (Continuous Fan)
Set fan and system selector switches at ON and OFF positions, respectively. Supply fan operates continuously to provide constant air circulation.
548J
START--UP, RTU--MP CONTROL
Field Service Test, explained below, will assist in proper start--up. Configuration of unit parameters, scheduling options, and operation a re also discussed in this section.
Field Service Test
The Field Service Test function can be used to verify proper operation of compressors, heating stages, indoor fan, power exhaust fans, economizer, and dehumidification. Use of Field Service Test is recommended at initial system start up and during troubleshooting.
Field Service Test mode has the following changes from normal operation:
S Outdoor air temperature limits for cooling circuits,
economizer, and heating are ignored.
S Normal compressor time guards and other staging delays
are ignored.
S The status of Alarms (except Fire and Safety chain) is
ignored but all alerts and alarms are still broadcasted on the network.
Field Service Test can be turned ON/OFF at the unit display or from the network. Once turned ON, other entries may be made with the display or through the network. To turn Field Service Test on, change the value of Test Mode to ON, to turn Field Service Test off, cha nge the value of Test Mode to OFF.
NOTE: Service Test mode is password protected when accessing from the display. Depending on the unit model, factory--installed options, and field--installed accessories, some of the Field Service Test functions may not apply.
The independent outputs (IndpOutputs) submenu is used to change output status for the supply fan, economizer, and Power Exhaust. These independe nt outputs can operate simultaneously with other Field Service Test modes. All outputs return to normal operation when Field Service Test is turned off.
The Cooling submenu is used to change output status for the individual compressors and the dehumidification relay. Compressor starts are not staggered. The fans and heating service test outputs are reset to OFF for the cooling
59
service test. Indoor fans and outdoor fans are controlled normally to maintain proper unit operat ion. All normal cooling alarms and alerts are functional.
NOTE: Circuit A is always operated with Circuit B due to outdoor fan control on Circuit A. Always test Circuit A first, and leave it on to test other Circuits.
The Heating submenu is used to change output status for the individual heat stages, gas or electric. The fans and cooling service test outputs are reset to OFF for the heating service test. All normal heating alarms and alerts are functional.
Configuration
The RTU--MP controller configuration points affect the unit operation and/or control. Review and understand the meaning and purpose of each configuration point before changing it from the factory default value. The submenus containing configuration points are as follows: Unit,
548J
Cooling, Heating, Inputs, Economizer, IAQ, Clock--Set, and User Password (USERPW). Each configuration point is described below under its according submenu.
Unit
Start Delay
This refers to the time delay the unit will wait after power up before it pursues any specific operation.
Factory Default = 5 sec Range = 0--600 sec
Filter Service Hours
This refers to the timer set for the Dirty Filter Alarm. After the number of runtime hours set on this point is exceeded the corresponding alarm will be generated, and must be manually cleared on the alarm reset screen after the maintenance has been completed. The timer will then begin counting its runtime again for the next maintenance interval.
Factory Default = 600 hr
NOTE: Setting this configuration timer to 0, disables the alarm.
Supply Fan Service Hours
This refers to the timer set for the Supply Fan Runtime Alarm. After the number of runtime hours set on this point is exceeded the corresponding alarm will be generated, and must be manually cleared on the alarm reset screen after the maintenance has been completed. The timer will then begin counting its runtime again for the next maintenance interval.
Factory Default = 0 hr
NOTE: Setting this configuration timer to 0, disables the alarm.
Compressor1 Service Hours
This refers to the timer set for the Compressor 1 Runtime Alarm. After the number of runtime hours set on this point is exceeded the corresponding alarm will be generated, and must be manually cleared on the alarm reset screen after the maintenance has been completed. The timer will then begin counting its runtime again for the next maintenance interval.
Factory Default = 0 hr
NOTE: Setting this configuration timer to 0, disables the alarm.
Compressor2 Service Hours
This refers to the timer set for the Compressor 2 Runtime Alarm. After the number of hours set on this point is exceeded the corresponding alarm will be generated, and must be manually cleared on the alarm rest screen after the maintenance has been completed. The timer will then begin counting its runtime again for the next maintenance interval
Factory Default = 0 hr
NOTE: Setting this configuration timer to 0, disables the alarm.
Cooling
Number of Compressor Stages
This refers to the number of mechanical cooling stages available on a specific unit. Set this point t o “One Stage” if there is one compressor in the specific unit, set to “Two Stage” if there are two compressors in the unit, and set to “None” if economizer cooling ONLY is desired.
Factory Default = One Stage for 1 compressor units Two Stage for 2 compressor units
Cooling/Econ SAT Low Setpt
The supply air temperature must remain above this value to allow cooling with the economizer and/or compressors. There is 5_F plus and minus deadba nd to this point. If the SAT falls below this value during cooling, all compressors will be staged off. The economizer will start to ramp down to minimum position when the SAT = this configuration +5_F.
Factory Default = 50_F Range = 45--75_F
Cooling Lockout Temp
This defines the minimum outdoor air temperature that cooling mode can be enabled and run. If the OAT falls below this threshold during cooling, then compressor cooling will not be allowed.
Factory Default = 45_F Range = 0--65_F
Heating
Heating SAT High Setpt
The supply air temperature must remain below this value to allow heating. There is 5_F plus and minus deadband to this point. If the SAT rises above this value during heating the heat stages will begin to decrease until the SAT has dropped below this value.
Factory Default = 120_F Range = 95--150_F
Heating Lockout Temp
This defines the maximum outdoor air temperature that heating mode can be enabled and run. If the OAT rises above this threshold during heating, then heating will not be allowed.
Factory Default = 65_F Range = 49--95_F
60
Inputs NOTE: For installation of inputs and field installed
accessories, refer to the appropriate sections.
Input 3
This input is a discrete input and can be configured to be one of five different inputs: No Function, Compressor Safety, Fan Status, Filter Status, or Remote Occupancy. This input can also be configured t o be eit her Normally Open (N/O) or Normally Closed (N/C). Input 3 is factory wired to pin J1--2. Field accessories get wired to its parallel pin J5--5. Do not connect inputs to both locations, one function per input.
Factory Default = Compressor Safety and N/O
NOTE: Compressor Safety input comes from the CLO board. J1--2 is always factory wired to TB1--8 (X) terminal on the unit. If the unit has a CLO board, do not configure input 3 for anything but Compressor Safety.
Input 5
This input is a discrete input and can be configured to be one of five different inputs: No Function, Fire Shutdown, Fan Status, Filter Status, or Remote Occupancy. This input can also be configured to be either Normally Open (N/O) or Normally Closed (N/C). Input 5 is factory wired to pin J1--10. Field accessories get wired to its parallel pin J5--3. Do not connect inputs to both locations, one function per input.
Factory Default = Fire Shutdown and N/C
NOTE: Fire Shutdown input comes from TB4--7. J1--10 is always factory wired to TB4 --7. Only change input 5s function if absolutely needed.
Input 8
This input is a discrete input and can be configured to be one of five different inputs: No Function, Enthalpy Switch, Fan Status, Filter Status, or Remote Occupancy. This input can also be configured t o be eit her Normally Open (N/O) or Normally Closed (N/C). Input 8 is factory wired to pin J2--6. Field accessories get wired to its parallel pin J5--1. Do not connect inputs to both locations, one function per input.
Factory Default = No Function and N/O
Input 9
This input is a discrete input and can be configured to be one of five different inputs: No Function, Humidistat, Fan Status, Filter Status, or Remote Occupancy. This input can also be configured to be either Normally Open (N/O) or Normally Closed (N/C). Input 9 is factory and field wired to pin J5--7. Do not connect inputs to both locations, one function per input.
Factory Default = Humidistat and N/O
Space Sensor Type
This tells the controller what type of space sensor is installed to run the unit. The three types that can be used are the T55 space sensor, the T56 space sensor, or the RS space sensor.
Factory Default = T55 Type
Input 1 Function
This input is an analog input and can be configured to be one of five different inputs: No Sensor, IAQ Sensor, OAQ Sensor, Space RH Sensor, or Outdoor RH Sensor. Input 1 iswiredtopinJ4--5.
Factory Default = No Sensor
Input 2 Function
This input is an analog input and can be configured to be one of five different inputs: No Sensor, IAQ Sensor, OAQ Sensor, Space RH Sensor, or Outdoor RH Sensor. Input 2 iswiredtopinJ4--2.
Factory Default = No Sensor
Setpoint Slider Range
This sets the slider range of the space sensor (with this built in function). The slider is used to offset the current control setpoint.
Factory Default = 5 n_F Range = 0--15 n_F
T55/56 Override Duration
This sets the occupancy override duration when the override button is pushed on the space sensor.
Factory Default = 1 hr Range = 0--24 hr
IAQ Low Reference @ 4mA
This is used when an IAQ sensor is insta lled on Input 1 or
2. This value is displayed and used when 4mA is seen at the input.
Factory Default = 0 PPM Range = 0--400 PPM
IAQ High Reference @ 20mA
This is used when an IAQ sensor is insta lled on Input 1 or
2. This value is displayed and used when 20mA is seen at the input.
Factory Default = 2000 PPM Range = 0--5000 PPM
NOTE: IAQ low Reference @ 4mA and IAQ High Reference @ 20mA are used to set the linear c urve of mA vs. PPM.
OAQ Low Reference @ 4mA
This is used when an OAQ sensor is installed on Input 1 or 2. This value is displayed and used when 4mA is seen at the input.
Factory Default = 0 PPM Range = 0--400 PPM
OAQ High Reference @ 20mA
This is used when an OAQ sensor is installed on Input 1 or 2. This value is displayed and used when 20mA is seen at the input.
Factory Default = 2000 PPM Range = 0--5000 PPM
NOTE: OAQ low Reference @ 4mA and OAQ High Reference @ 20mA are used to set the linear c urve of mA vs. PPM.
548J
61
Economizer
Economizer Exists
This point tells the controller if there is an economizer installed on the unit.
Factory Default = NO if no economizer YES if there is an economizer installed
Economizer Minimum Positi on
This defines the lowest economizer position when the indoor fan is running and the building is occupied.
Factory Default = 20% Range = 0--100 %
Economizer High OAT Lockout
If the outdoor air temperature rises above this value, economizer cooling will be disabled and dampers will return and stay at minimum position.
548J
Factory Default = 75_F Range = 55--80_F
Power Exhaust Setpt
When the economizer damper position opens above this point the power exhaust operation will begin. When the damper position falls 10% below the setpoint, the power exhaust will shutdown.
Factory Default = 50% Range = 20--90 %
NOTE: This point is only used when Continuous Occ Exhaust = NO
Continuous Occ Exhaust
This point tells the controller when to run the power exhaust if equi pped on the unit. If set to YES, the power exhaust will be on all the time when in occupied mode and will be off when in unoccupied mode. If set to NO the power exhaust will be controlled by the Power Exhaust Setpoint.
Factory Default = NO
IAQ
Max Differential CO
2
Setpt
If the difference between indoor an outdoor air quality becomes greater then this value the damper position will stay at the IAQ Greatest Min Dmpr Pos. configuration point
Factory Default = 650 PPM Range = 300--950 PPM
IAQ Greatest Min Dmpr Pos.
This is the greatest minimum position t he economizer will open to while trying to control the indoor air quality, CO differential.
Factory Default = 50% open Range = 10--60% open
Clockset
This submenu screen allows you to set the date and time manually. The Daylight Savings Time (DST) can also be changed here. The date and time is automatically set when ever software is downloaded. The clock is a 24 hour clock and not am/pm. The time should be verified (and maybe changed) according to unit location and time zone.
Factory Default = Eastern Standard Time
USERPW
This submenu screen allows you to change the user password to a four number password of choice. The User password change screen is only accessible with the Administrator Password (1111). The ADMIN password will always override the user password.
OPERATING SEQUENCE
Indoor (Supply) Fan
Continuous fan operation is selected at the thermostat. Terminal G is energized. Defrost Board (DFB) receives this signal at P2--3 and it issues an output at P3--9.
04A--06A, Standard Static Drive option: 24--v signal at P3--9 is applied to direct --drive motor communication signal terminal. Direct--drive motor starts and runs.
All Belt--Drive Fan options: Contactor coil IFC is energized; indoor fan motor starts.
Fan runs continuously until fan selection a t thermostat is changed to AUTO. When the selector switch is switched to AUTO, the input at P2--3 is removed and the output at P3--9 is removed; IFC is de--energized and IFM stops. If the fan selection is AUTO, indoor fan operation will be initiated by the DFB through P3--9 when Cooling or Heating sequence is initiated. Termination of fan operation will be delayed by 30 secs (if Fan Delay is configured to ON) after Cooling or Heating sequence is ended
Base Unit Controls
Cooling, Units Without Economizer
Continuous fan operation is selected at the thermostat. Terminal G is energized. Defrost Board (DFB) receives this signal at P2--3 and it issues an output at P3--9.
04A--06A, Standard Static Drive option: 24--v signal at P3--9 is applied to direct --drive motor communication signal terminal. Direct--drive motor starts and runs.
All Belt--Drive Fan options: Contactor coil IFC is energized; indoor fan motor starts.
Fan runs continuously until fan selection a t thermostat is changed to AUTO. When the selector switch is switched to AUTO, the input at P2----3 is removed and the output at P3--9 is removed; IFC is de--energized and IFM stops. If the fan selection is AUTO, indoor fan operation will be initiated by the DFB through P3----9 when Cooling or
2
Heating sequence is initiated. Termination of fan operation will be delayed by 30 secs (if Fan Delay is configured to ON) after Cooling or Heating sequence is ended.
The outdoor fan motors run continuously while unit is in Stage 1 or Stage 2 cooling.
08D–09D: If Stage 1 cooling does not satisfy the space load, the space temperature will rise until thermostat calls for Stage 2 cooling (Y2 closes). DFB receives this input at P2--4. It issues outputs at P3--6 (RVS2) and P3--8 (COMP2). Reversing valve 2 switches to Cooling
62
position. Compressor 2 contactor (C2) is energized; Compressor 2 starts and Circuit 2 operates in Cooling mode.
When Cooling Stage 2 is satisfied, thermostat Y2 opens. Compressor 2 c ontactor (C2) is de--energized; Compressor 2 stops. RVS2 remains energized.
When Cooling Stage 1 is satisfied, thermostat Y1 opens. Compressor 1 c ontactor (C1) is de--energized; Compressor 1 stops. Outdoor fan relay OFR is de--energize d; outdoor fans stop. After the Fan Delay period, the Indoor fan contactor IFC is de--energized; indoor fan stops (unless Continuous Fan operation has been selected). RVS1 remains energized.
Reversing valve solenoids are energized in Cooling modes. Each solenoid will remain energized until the next Heating mode is initiated for this circuit.
Heating, Units Without Economizer
04A--07A (single compressor model): When the thermostat calls for heating, terminal W1 is energized. DFB receives this input at P2–7. The DFB removes the output at P3–7 (RVS1) reversing valve solenoid is de--energized and reversing valve moves to Heating position. DFB issues outputs at P3–9 (IFO), OF, and P3–10 (COMP1). The indoor fan motor or contactor (IFC) is energized; indoor fan mot or starts. Outdoor fan relay OFR is energized; outdoor fan motor runs. Compressor contactor C1 is energized; refrigeration circuit operates in Heating mode.
08D--09D (two compressor model): When the thermostat calls for heating, terminal W1 is energized. DFB receives this input at P2–7. The DFB removes the outputs at P3–7 (RVS1) and P3–6 (RVS2)); both reversing valve solenoids are de--energized and reversing valves move to Heating position. DFB issues outputs at P3–9 (IFO), OF, P3–10 (COMP1) and P3–8 (COMP2)). The indoor fan contactor (IFC) is energized; indoor fan motor starts. Outdoor fan relay OFR is energized; both outdoor fan motors run. Compressor contactors C1 and C2 are energized; both refrigeration circuits operate in Heating mode.
If Stage 1 heating does not satisfy the space load, the space temperature will fall until thermostat calls for Stage 2 heating (W2 closes). Terminal W2 is energized. DFB receives input at P2--6. DFB issues an output at EHEAT. Heater contactor 1 (HC1) and heater contactor 2 (HC2) (if installed) are energized; all electric heaters are energized.
When space heating load is partially satisfied, thermostat terminal W2 is de--energized; this signal is removed at DFB P2--6. DFB output at EHEAT is removed; heater contactors HC1 and HC2 are de--energized and all electric heat is terminated. Stage 1 heating continues.
When the space heating load is fully satisfied, thermostat terminal W1 is also de--energized. DFB removes outputs at P3--10 (COMP1), P3--8 (COMP2) and OF. All compressor and outdoor fan operations cease. After the Fan Delay period, output P3--9 is removed and IFM operations cease (unless Continuous Fan operation has been selected).
Reversing valve solenoids remain de--energized until the next call for Cooling mode is initiated.
Cooling, Unit With EconoMi$er IV
For Occupied mode operation of EconoMi$er IV, there must be a 24--v signal at terminal N (provided through harness plug PL6--3 from the unit’s IFC coil). Removing the signal at N places the EconoMi$er IV control in Unoccupied mode. During Occupied mode operation, indoor fan operation will be accompanied by economizer dampers moving to Minimum Position setpoint for ventilation. If indoor fan is off, dampers will close. During Unoccupied mode operation, dampers will remain closed unless a Cooling (by free cool ing) or DCV dema nd is received.
When free cooling using outside air is not available, the unit cooling sequence will be controlled directly by the space thermostat as described above in Cooling, Unit Without Economizer. Outside air damper position will be closed or Minimum Position as determined by occupancy mode and fan signal.
When free cooling is available as determined by the appropriate changeover command (dry bulb, outdoor enthalpy, differential dry bulb or differential enthalpy), a call for cooling (Y1 closes at the thermostat, signal through PL6--2 to Econo--1) will cause the economizer control to modulate the dampers open and closed to maintain the unit supply air temperature at 50_Fto55_F (10_C to 12.8_C). Compressor will not run.
During free cooling operation, a supply air temperature (SAT) above 50_F(10_C) will cause the dampers to modulate between Minimum Position setpoint and 100% open. With SAT from 50_Fto45_F(10_Cto7.2_C), the dampers will maintain at the Minimum Position setting. With SAT below 45_F (7.2_C), the outside air dampers will be closed. When SAT rises to 48_F (8.9_C), the dampers will re--open to Minimum Position setting.
Should 100% outside air not be capable of satisfying the space temperature, space temperature will rise until Y2 is closed. The economizer control will call for compressor operation. Y2 signal is transferred to the DFB’s Y1 input (P2--5). Stage 1 Cooling is initiated as described above in Cooling, Unit Without Economizer. Dampers will modulate to maintain SAT at 50_Fto55_F(10_Cto
12.8_C) concurrent with Compressor 1 operation. When thermostat Stage 2 cooling is satisfied, DFB outputs for COMP1 and OF will be removed and mechanical cooling sequence will terminate.
The Low Ambient Lockout Thermostat will block compressor operation with economizer operation below 42_F (5.6_C ) outside air temperature.
When space temperature demand is satisfied (thermostat Y1 opens), the dampers will return to Minimum Damper position if indoor fan is running or fully closed if fan is off.
If accessory power exhaust is installed, the power exhaust fan motors will be energized by the economizer control as the dampers open above the PE--On setpoint and will be
548J
63
de--energized as the dampers close below the PE-- On setpoint.
Damper movement from full closed to full open (or vice versa) will take between 1
1
/2and 21/2minutes.
Heating With E conoMi$er IV
During Occupied mode operation, indoor fan operati on will be accompanied by economizer dampers m oving to Minimum Position setpoint for ventilation. If indoor fan is off, dampers will close. During Unoccupied mode operation, dampers will remain closed unless a DCV demand is received.
When the room temperature calls for heat (W1 closes), the heating controls are energized as described in Heating, Unit Without Economizer above.
Defrost Cycle
548J
During the Heating Mode, frost and ice can develop on the outdoor coil. Defrost sequence will clear the frost and ice from the coil by briefly reversing the Heating sequence periodically.
A window to test for a need to run the Defrost cycle opens 30 minutes after the end of the last Defrost cycle or the previous test window closed. If DFT2 is closed, the Defrost cycle will start. Output at OF is re moved; outdoor fans stop during the Defrost cycle. Output P3--6 (RVS2) is energized; reversing valve solenoid RVS2 is energized and reversing valve 2 changes position, placing Circuit 2 in a Cooling mode flow, directing hot gas into the outdoor coil where its heat melts the frost and looses the ice on the coil face.
During the Defrost cycle, output EHEAT is also energized (if not already energized by a thermostat W2 demand); electric heaters will be energized.
During the Defrost Cycle, LED1 on the DFB will be illuminated.
The Defrost cycle ends when DFT2 opens (as liquid temperature exiting the coil rises above DFT2 setpoint) or the defrost cycle runs for 10 m inutes. Output at EHEAT is removed; electric heaters will be de--energized (unless thermostat has a W2 dem and). Output at OF is restored; outdoor fans start again. Output at P3--6 (RVS2) is removed; reversing valve 2 returns to Heating position.
During the Circuit 2 defrost cycle, Circuit 1 may also enter defrost cycle if DFT1 closes. When DFT1 closes, DFB output P3--7 (RVS1) is energized; reversing valve solenoid 1 is energized, causing reversing valve 1 to switch position and place Circuit 1 in a Cooling mode flow. Defrost in Circuit 1 ends when DFT1 opens or defrost cycle in Circuit 2 is terminated.
Defrost cycle is fixed at a maximum 10 minute duration limit. The period to test and initiate a Defrost cycle can be selected at 30, 60, 90 or 120 minutes.
Emergency Heat
Emergency Heat is a non-- staged heating cycle that uses the unit’s electric heaters only (no compression heating is energized). Emergency Heat is initiated when the defrost board receives an input signal at W2 (P2--6) but there is no input signal at W1 (P2--7). This signal combination can be provided by thermostat configuration, manual external switch selection or by servicer disconnecting the W1 field connection.
Upon initiation of the Emergency Heat sequence, the DFB will issue output signals at IFO (P3--9) and EHEAT; IFM will run and electric heaters will be energized.
When space heating load is satisfied, the input signal at W2 (P2--6) will be removed. Output at EHEAT is removed; electric heaters are de--energized. After the Fan Delay period, the signal at IFO (P3--9) is removed; IFM stops.
Demand Controlled Ventilation
If a field--installed sensor is connected to the EconoMi$er IV control, a Demand Controlled Ventilation strategy will operate automatically. As the level in the space increases above the setpoi nt (on the EconoMi$er IV controller), the minimum position of the dampers will be increased proportionally, until the Maximum Ventilation setting is reached. As the space level decreases because of the increase in fresh air, the outdoor--dam per will follow the higher demand condition from the DCV mode or from the free--cooling mode.
DCV operation is available in Occupied and Unoccupied periods with EconoMi$er IV. However, a control modification will be required on the 50TC unit to implement the Unoccupied period function.
Supplemental Controls
Compressor Lockout Relay ( CLO) – The CLO is available as a factory-installed option or as a field-installed accessory. Each compressor has a CLO. The CLO compares the demand for compressor operation (via a 24-v input from Y at CL O terminal 2) to operat ion of the compressor (determined via compressor current signal input at the CLO’s current transformer loop); if the compressor current signal is lost while the demand input still exists, the CLO will trip open and prevent the compressor from restarting until the CLO has been manually reset. In the lockout condition, 24-v will be available at terminal X. Reset is accomplished by removing the input signal at terminal 2; open the thermostat briefly or c ycle the main power to the unit.
Phase Monitor Relay (PMR) – The PMR protects the unit in the event of a loss of a phase or a reversal of power line phase in the three-phase unit power supply. In normal operation, the relay K1 is energized (contact set closed) and red LED indicator is on steady. If the PMR detects a loss of a phase or a phase sequence reversal, the relay K1 is energized, its contact set is opened and unit operation is stopped; red LED indicator will blink during lockout condition. Reset of the PMR is automatic when al l phases
64
are restored and phase sequence is correct. If no 24-v control power is available to the PMR, the red LED will be off.
RTU--MP Sequence of Operation
The RTU--MP will control the compressor, economizer and heating outputs based on its own space temperature input and setpoints. An optional CO in the space can influence the economizer minimum position. The RTU--MP has its own hardware clock that is set automatically when the software is installed on the board. The RTU--MP’s default is to control to occupied setpoints all the time, until a type of occupancy control is set. Occupancy types are described in the scheduling section. The following sections describe the operation for the functions of the RTU--MP. All point objects that are referred to in this sequence will be in reference to the objects as viewed in BACview
Scheduling
Scheduling is used to start heating or cooling (become occupied) based upon a day of week and a time period and control to the occupied heating or cooling setpoints. Scheduling functions are located under occupancy determination and the schedule menu accessed by the Menu softkey (see Form 48--50H--T--2T, Appendix -- for menu structure). Your local time and date should be set for these functions to operate properly. Five scheduling functions are available by changing the Occupancy Source to one of the following selections:
Always Occupied (Default Occupancy)
The unit will run continuously. RTU--MP ships from the factory with this setting.
Local Schedule
The unit will operate according to the schedule configured and stored in the unit. The local schedule is made up of three hierarchy levels that consist of two Override schedules, twelve Holiday and four Daily schedules, and are only accessible by the BACview screen (handheld or virtual).
The Daily schedule is the lowest schedule in the hierarchy and is overridden by both the Holiday and Override schedule. It consists of a start time, a stop time (both in 24 hour mode) and the seven days of the week, starting with Monday and ending in Sunday. To sel ect a daily schedule scroll to the Schedules menu off of the Menu selection. Enter the User password and change the Occupancy Source to Local Schedule. Scroll down a nd over to the Daily menu and press enter. Choose one of the four Daily schedules by pressing the Next softkey and change t he Use? point from NO to YES by selecting the point and pressing the INCR or DECR softkey. Press the OK softkey and scroll to the start and stop times. Edit these times following the same steps as the Use? point. Finally scroll down to the Days: section and highlight the days required for the Daily schedule by INCR or DECR softkeys and press OK softkey.
The Holiday schedule is created to override the Daily schedule and identify a specific day and month of the year to start and stop the unit and change control to the unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints. Follow the same steps to turn on one of the twelve Holiday schedules
IAQ sensor mounted
2
6
Handheld.
and start and stop times. Next, select one out of the twelve months and one out of the thirty--one days of that month. The RTU--MP will now ignore the Daily schedule for the specific day and time you selected and follow the Holiday Schedule for this period.
The Override schedules primary purpose is to provide a temporary change in the occupied heating and cooling setpoints and force the unit to control to the unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints. This would occur on a set day in a particular month and last during the start a nd stop time configured. The Override schedule is enabled by following the same steps to create the Holiday schedule.
NOTE: Push button override is only available when running a local or BACnet Schedule.
BACnet Schedule
For use with a Building Automation System that supports native BACnet scheduling is scheduling the unit. With the Occupancy Source set to BACnet schedule the BAS will control the unit through network communi cation and it’s own scheduling function.
BAS On/Off
The Building Automation System is scheduling the unit via an On/Off command to the BAS ON/OFF software point. The Building Automation System can be speaking BACnet, Modbus, or N2 and is writing t o the BAS On/Off point in the open protocol point map.
NOTE: If the BAS supports NATIVE BACnet scheduling, then set the Occupancy Source to BACnet schedule. If the BAS is BACnet but does NOT support NATIVE BACnet scheduling, then set the Occupancy Source to BAS On/Off.
DI On/Off
A hard--wired input on the RTU--MP will command the unit to start/stop. Inputs 3, 5, 8, and 9 on plug J5 can be hard--wired to command the unit to start/stop.
NOTE: Scheduling can either be controlled via the unit or the BAS, but NOT both.
Indoor
Fan
The indoor fan will be turned on whenever any one of the following conditions is true:
S It is in the occupied mode. This will be determined by its
own internal occupancy schedule.
S Whenever there is a demand for cooling or heating in the
unoccupied mode.
S Whenever the remote occupancy switch is closed during
DI On/Off schedule type or if occupa ncy is forced occupied by the BAS during BAS On/Off schedule type.
When transitioning from unoccupied to occupied, there will be a configured time delay of 5 to 600 seconds before starting the fan. The fan will continue to run as long as compressors, heating stages, or the dehumidification relays are on when transitioning from occupied to unoccupied with t he exception of Shutdown mode. If Fire Shutdown, safety chain, SAT alarm or SPT alarm are active; the fan will be shutdown immediately regardless of the occupancy state or demand.
The RTU--MP has an optional Supply Fan Status input t o provide proof of airflow. If this is enabled, t he point will
548J
65
look for a contact closure whenever the Supply Fan Relay is on. If it is not enabled then it will always be the same state as the Supply Fan Relay. The cooling, economizer, heating, dehumidification, CO
and power exha ust
2
routines will use this input point for fan status.
Cooling
The compressor outputs are controlled by the Cooling Control PID Loop and Cooling Stages Capacity algorithm. They will be used to calculate the desired number of stages needed to satisfy the space by comparing the Space Temperature (SPT) to the Occupied Cool Setpoint plus the T56 slider offset when occupied and the Unoccupied Cool Setpoint (UCSP) plus the T56 slider offset, if unoccupied. The economizer, if available, will be used for cooling in addition to the compressors. The following conditions must be true in order for this algorithm to run:
S Indoor Fan has been ON for at least 30 seconds.
548J
S Heat mode is not active and the time guard between
modes equals zero.
S If occupied and the SPT >(occupied cool setpoint plus
the T56 slider offset).
S Space Temperature reading is available. S If it is unoccupi ed and the SPT > (unoccupied cool
setpoint plus the T56 slider offset). The indoor fan will be turned on by the staging algorithm.
S If economizer is available and active and economizer
open > 85% and SAT > (SAT low limit + 5_F) and SPT > effective setpoint + 0.5_F.
OR
Economizer is available, but not active
OR
Economizer is not available
S OAT > DX Lockout temperature.
If all of the above conditions are met, the compressors will be energized as required, otherwise they will be de--energized.
There is a fixed 3--minute minimum on time and a 5--minute off time for each compressor output and a 3--minute minimum time delay between staging up or down.
Any time the compressors are running the RTU--MP will stage down the compressors if the SAT becomes less than the cooling low supply air setpoint.
After a compressor is staged off, it may be started again after a normal time--guard period and the supply air temperature has increased above the low supply air setpoint.
Economizer
The Economizer dampers are used to provide free cooling and Indoor Air Quality, if optional CO
sensor is installed,
2
when the outside conditions are suitable. The following conditions must be true for economizer
operation:
S Indoor Fan has been on for at least 30 seconds. S Enthalpy is Low if the Enthalpy input is ena bled. S SAT reading is available. S OAT reading is available. S SPT reading is available.
S OAT <= High OAT economizer lockout configuration
(default = 75).
S OAT <= SPT
If any of the mentioned conditions are not true, the economizer will be set to its configured minimum position. The minimum damper position can be overridden by the IAQ routine described later in this section.
If the above conditions are true, the Economizer Control Master Loop will calculate a damper position value based on the following calculation: Damper Position = minimum position + PID (SPT -- econ setpoint). Econ setpoint is half way between the effective cool and heat setpoints. If the SAT drops below the cooling low supply air setpoint (+ 5_F), the economizer will ramp down to minimum position.
Exhaust
Power
If RTU-- MP is also controlling an exhaust fan, it can be enabled based on damper position or by occupancy. If configured for continuous occupied operation, it will be energized whenever the controller is in the occupied mode and disabled when in the unoccupied mode. If configured for damper position control, it will be energized whenever the economizer exceeds the power exhaust setpoint and disabled when t he economizer drops below the setpoint by a fixed hysteresis of 10%.
Heating
The heating outputs are controlled by the Heating Control PID Loop and Heating Stages Capacity algorithm. They will be used to calculate the desired number of stages needed to satisfy the space by comparing the SPT to the Occupied Heat Setpoint plus the T56 slider offset when occupied and the Unoccupied Heat Setpoint plus the T56 slider offset if unoccupied. The following conditions must be true in order for this algorithm to run:
S Indoor Fan has been ON for at least 30 seconds. S Cool mode is not active and the time guard between
modes equals zero.
S If occupied and SPT <(occupied heat setpoint plus T56
slider offset)
S SPT reading is available S If it is unoccupi ed and the SPT < (unocc upied he at
setpoint plus T56 slider offset). The indoor fan will be turned on by the staging algorithm.
S OAT < High OAT lockout temperature.
If all of the above conditions are met, the heating outputs will be energized as required, otherwise they will be de--energized. If the SAT begins to exceed the high supply air setpoint, a ramping function will cause the Heat Stages Capacity algorithm to decrease the number of stages until the SAT has dropped below the setpoint.
There is a fixed one minute minimum on time and a one minute off time for each heat output. Heat staging has a 3 minute stage up and 30 second stage down delay.
Indoor Air
Quality
If the optional indoor air quality sensor is installed, the RTU--MP will maintain indoor air quality within the space at the user configured differential setpoint. The setpoint is
66
the difference between the indoor air quality and an optional outdoor air quality sensor. If the outdoor air quality is not present then a fixed value of 400ppm is used. The following conditions must be true in order for this algorithm to run:
S The mode is occupied. S Indoor Fan has been ON for at least 30 seconds. S Indoor Air Quality sensor has a valid reading
As air quality within the space changes, the minimum position of the economizer damper will be changed thus allowing more or less outdoor air into the space depending on the relationship of the indoor air quality to the
greatest value becomes the final minimum damper position of the economizer output.
If the calculated IAQ minimum position is greater than the IAQ maximum damper position configuration then it will be clamped to the configured value.
Demand
Limit
If the RTU--MP receives a level 1 (one degree offset), 2 (two degree offset), or a 3 (4 degree offset) to the BACnet demand limit variable, the controller will expand the heating and cooling setpoints by the configured demand limit setpoint value and remain in effect until the BACnet demand limit variable receives a 0 value.
differential setpoint. If all the above conditions are true, the IAQ algorithm will run and calculates an IAQ
FASTENER TORQUE VALUES
minimum position value using a PID loop. The IAQ minimum damper position is then compared against the
See Table 24 for torque value s.
user configured economizer minimum position and the
Table 24 – T orque Values
Supply fan motor mounting 120 ¦ 12 in --- lbs 13.6 ¦ 1.4 Nm
Supply fan motor adjustment plate 120 ¦ 12 in ---lbs 13.6 ¦ 1.4 Nm
Motor pulley setscrew 72 ¦ 5 i n --- l bs 8.1 ¦ 0.6 Nm
Fan pulley setscrew 72 ¦ 5 i n --- l b s 8.1 ¦ 0.6 Nm
Blower wheel hub setscrew 72 ¦5in---lbs 8.1 ¦0.6 Nm
Bearing locking collar setscrew 65 to70 in --- lbs 7.3 to 7.9 Nm
Compressor mounting bolts 65 to75 in --- lbs 7.3 to 7.9 Nm
Condenser fan motor mounting bolts 65 to75 in ---lbs 7.3 to 7.9 Nm
Condenser fan motor mounting bolts 20 ¦ 2 i n --- l bs 2.3 ¦ 0.2 Nm
Condenser fan hub setscrew 84 ¦ 1 2 i n --- l bs 9.5 ¦ 1.4 Nm
548J
04A ---06A Direct - -- Drive:
Motor mount arm 60 ¦ 5 i n --- l b s 6.8 ¦ 0.5 Nm
Fan wheel hub setscrew 120 ¦ 12 in --- lbs 13.6 ¦ 1.4 Nm
Motor belly band bolt 80 ¦ 5 i n --- l bs 9.0 ¦ 0.6 Nm
67
APPENDIX I. MODEL NUMBER SIGNIFICANCE
MODEL NUMBER NOMENCLATURE
123456789101112131415161718
5 4 8 J P 0 6 A 0 0 0 A 0 B 0 A A --
____________ ______ ________ ______
Unit Type Design Revision
548J = High Eff. Heat Pump --- = First Revision
Voltage Packaging
E = 4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0 A=Standard
J = 208/230 --- 1 --- 60 B=LTL
P = 208/230 - -- 3 --- 60
T = 5 7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
Cooling Tons
548J
04=3Ton 07=6Ton Outdoor Air Options
05 = 4 Ton 08 = 7.5 Ton A=None
06 = 5 Ton 09 = 8.5 Ton B=Tempeconow/barorelief
Refrig. System Options H = Enthalpy econo w/ baro relief
A = One---Stage Cooling Models L = Enthalpy econo w/ baro relief & CO
D = Two- -- Stage Cooling Models Q = Motorized 2 pos damper
Factory Installed Options
E=Tempeconow/barorelief&CO
2
2
Heat Level (Field--- installed electric heaters available) Indoor Fan Options
000 = No Heat 0 = Electric Drive X13 Motor (04 --- 06)
1 = Standard static option --- Belt Drive
Coil Options (Outdoor --- Indoor) 2 = Medium static option --- Belt Drive
A = Al/Cu --- Al/Cu 3 = High static option --- Belt Drive
B = P r e c oa t A l/ C u --- A l/ C u
C = E --- c oa t A l/ C u --- A l / C u
D = E --- c oa t A l / C u --- E --- c o a t A l / C u
E = C u /C u --- A l/ Cu
F = Cu/Cu --- Cu/Cu
M = A l / C u --- A l/ Cu --- L ou v e r e d H a i l g u ar ds
N = P r e c oa t A l/ C u --- A l/ C u --- L ou ve re d H a i l G u a r d s
P = E c o at A l/ C u --- A l/ C u --- L o u v e r e d H a i l G u a r d s
Q = E c o a t A l/ C u --- E c o at A l/ C u --- L o u v e r e d H a i l G u a r d s
R = C u / C u --- A l /C u --- L o u v e r e d H a i l G ua rd s
S = C u /C u --- C u / C u --- L o u v e re d H a i l G u a r d s
Serial Number Format
POSITION NUMBER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TYPICAL 0 4 0 9 G 1 2 3 4 5
POSITION DESIGNATES
1---2 Week of manufacture (fiscal calendar) 3---4 Year of manufacture (“08” = 2008)
5 Manufacturing location (G = ETP, Texas, USA)
6--- 10 Sequential number
68
APPENDIX II. PHYSICAL DATA
Physical Data (Cooling) 3 -- 6 TONS
548J*04A 548J*05A 548J*06A 548J*07A
Refrigeration System
#Circuits/#Comp./Type 1/1/Scroll 1/1/Scroll 1/1/Scroll 1/1/Scroll
Puron (R --- 410a) charge A/B (lbs) 9---8 / --- 1 1 --- 1 1 / --- 1 2 --- 1 3 / --- 16 --- 1 3 / ---
O il A / B ( o z ) 4 2 / --- 4 2 / --- 4 2 / --- 5 6 / ---
Metering Device Accutrol Accutrol Accutrol Accutrol
High---press. Trip / Reset (psig) 630 / 505 630 / 505 630 / 505 630 / 505
Low---press. Trip / Reset (psig) 27 / 44 27 / 44 27 / 44 27 / 44
Indoor Coil
Material Cu / Al Cu / Al Cu / Al Cu / Al
Coil type 3/8” RTPF 3/8” RTPF 3/8” RTPF 3/8” RTPF
Rows / FPI 3 / 15 4/15 4/15 4/15
Tot a l Fac e Ar e a (f t2)5.5 5.5 7.3 7.3
Condensate Drain Conn. Size 3/4” 3/4” 3/4” 3/4”
Evaporator Fan and Motor
Motor Qty / Drive Type 1/Direct 1/Direct 1/Direct n/a
Max BHP 1 1 1 #N/A
RPM Range 600--- 1200 600 ---1200 600---1200 #N/A
1phase
Standard Static
Motor Frame Size 48 48 48 #N/A
Fan Qty / Type 1/Centrifugal 1/Centrifugal 1/Centrifugal n/Centrifugal
Fan Diameter (in) 10 x 10 10 x 10 11 x 10 #N/A
548J
3phase
Standard Static
3phase
Medium Static
3phase
High Static
Outdoor Coil
Outdoor fan / motor
Filters
Motor Qty / Drive Type 1/Direct 1/Direct 1/Direct 1/Belt
Max BHP 1 1 1 1.5
RPM Range 600--- 1200 600 ---1200 600---1200 878 --- 1192
Motor Frame Size 48 48 48 56
Fan Qty / Type 1/Centrifugal 1/Centrifugal 1/Centrifugal
Fan Diameter (in) 10 x 10 10 x 10 11 x 10 10 x 10
Motor Qty / Drive Type 1/Belt 1/Belt 1/Belt 1/Belt
Max BHP 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.9
RPM Range 819--- 1251 920 ---1303 1066 --- 1380 1066 --- 1380
Motor Frame Size 56 56 56 56
Fan Qty / Type 1/Centrifugal 1/Centrifugal 1/Centrifugal 1/Centrifugal
Fan Diameter (in) 10 x 10 10 x 10 10 x 10 10 x 10
Motor Qty / Drive Type 1/Belt 1/Belt 1/Belt 1/Belt
Max BHP 2.0 2.0 2.9 2.9
RPM Range 1035---1466 1035---1466 1208--- 1639 1208 --- 1639
Motor Frame Size 56 56 56 56
Fan Qty / Type 1/Centrifugal 1/Centrifugal 1/Centrifugal 1/Centrifugal
Fan Diameter (in) 10 x 10 10 x 10 10 x 10 10 x 10
Material Cu / Al Cu / Al Cu / Al Cu / Al
Coil type 3/8” RTPF 3/8” RTPF 3/8” RTPF 3/8” RTPF
Rows / FPI 2 / 17 2/17 2/17 2/17
Tot a l Fac e Ar e a (f t2) 10.7 12.7 15.0 21.3
Qty / Motor Drive Type 1/ Direct 1/Direct 1/Direct 1/ Direct
Motor HP / RPM 1/8 / 825 1/4 / 1100 1/4 / 1100 1/4 / 1100
Fan diameter (in) 22 22 22 22
RAFilter#/Size(in) 2/16x25x2 2/16x25x2 4/16x16x2 4/16x16x2
OA inlet screen # / Size (in) 1/20x24x1 1/20x24x1 1/20x24x1 1/20x24x1
Cu / AI: Copper Tube / Aluminum Fin RTPF: Round Tube / Plate Fin
69
548J
APPENDIX II. PHYSICAL DATA (cont.)
Physical Data (Cooling) 7.5 -- 8.5 TONS
548J*08D 548J*09D
Refrigeration System
#Circuits/#Comp./Type 2/2/Scroll 2/2/Scroll
Puron (R --- 410a) charge A/B (lbs) 10---3 / 10 --- 3 1 1 --- 2 / 1 1 --- 2
Oil A/B (oz) 42 / 42 42 / 42
Metering Device Accutrol Accutrol
High---press. Trip / Reset (psig) 630 / 505 630 / 505
Low---press. Trip / Reset (psig) 27 / 44 27 / 44
Indoor Coil
Material Cu / Al Cu / Al
Coil type 3/8” RTPF 3/8” RTPF
Rows / FPI 3 / 15 4/15
Tot a l Fac e Ar e a (f t2) 11.1 11.1
Condensate Drain Conn. Size 3/4” 3/4”
Evaporator Fan and Motor
Motor Qty / Drive Type 1/Belt 1/Belt
Max BHP 1.2 1.2
RPM Range 460---652 460--- 652
3phase
Standard Static
Motor Frame Size 56 56
Fan Qty / Type 1/Centrifugal 1/Centrifugal
Fan Diameter (in) 15 x 15 15 x 15
3phase
Medium Static
3phase
High Static
Outdoor Coil
Outdoor fan / motor
Filters
Motor Qty / Drive Type 1/Belt 1/Belt
Max BHP 2.9 2.9
RPM Range 591---838 591--- 838
Motor Frame Size 56 56
Fan Qty / Type 1/Centrifugal 1/Centrifugal
Fan Diameter (in) 15 x 15 15 x 15
Motor Qty / Drive Type 1/Belt 1/Belt
Max BHP 2.9 2.9
RPM Range 838 --- 1084 838---1084
Motor Frame Size 56 56
Fan Qty / Type 1/Centrifugal 1/Centrifugal
Fan Diameter (in) 15 x 15 15 x 15
Material Cu / Al Cu / Al
Coil type 3/8” RTPF 3/8” RTPF
Rows / FPI 2 / 17 2/17
Tot a l Fac e Ar e a (f t2) 25.1 25.1
Qty / Motor Drive Type 2 / Direct 2/Direct
Motor HP / RPM 1/4 / 1100 1/4 / 1100
Fan diameter (in) 22 22
RAFilter#/Size(in) 4/16x20x2 4/20x20x2
OA inlet screen # / Size (in) 1/20x24x1 1/20x24x1
Cu / AI: Copper Tube / Aluminum Fin RTPF: Round Tube / Plate Fin
70
APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE
General Fan Performance Notes:
1. Interpolation is permissible. Do not extrapolate.
2. External static pressure is the static pressure difference between the return duct and the supply duct plus the static pressure caused by any FIOPs or accessories.
3. Tabular data accounts for pressure loss due to clean filters, unit casing, and wet coils. Factory options and accessories may add static pressure losses.
4. The Fan Performance tables offer motor/drive rec ommendations. In cases when two motor/drive combinations would work, Bryant recommended the lower horsepower option.
5. For information on the electrical properties of Bryant’s motors, please see the Electrical information section of this book.
548J
71
APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE
Table 25 – 548J*04A ELECTRIC DRIVE, X13 MOTOR, 3 TON HORIZONTAL SUPPLY
SPEED
(TORQUE)
TAP
1
548J
2
3
4
5
CFM ESP BHP
900 0.70 0.31
975 0.60 0.30 1050 0.50 0.29 1125 0.39 0.27 1200 0.29 0.26 1275 0.21 0.24 1350 0.12 0.23 1425 0.03 0.21 1500 --- ---
900 0.85 0.37
975 0.76 0.36 1050 0.66 0.36 1125 0.55 0.34 1200 0.46 0.34 1275 0.36 0.32 1350 0.27 0.31 1425 0.17 0.29 1500 0.07 0.27
900 1.02 0.44
975 0.94 0.45 1050 0.86 0.45 1125 0.79 0.45 1200 0.71 0.45 1275 0.61 0.44 1350 0.51 0.43 1425 0.40 0.41 1500 0.29 0.39
900 1.12 0.49
975 1.06 0.50 1050 1.00 0.52 1125 0.95 0.53 1200 0.89 0.54 1275 0.80 0.53 1350 0.70 0.52 1425 0.57 0.50 1500 0.46 0.49
900 1.18 0.52
975 1.14 0.54 1050 1.10 0.56 1125 1.06 0.58 1200 1.02 0.60 1275 0.98 0.63 1350 0.94 0.65 1425 0.90 0.68 1500 0.87 0.71
Table 26 – 548J*04A ELECTRIC DRIVE, X13 MOTOR, 3 TON VERTICAL SUPPLY
SPEED
(TORQUE)
TAP
1
2
3
4
5
CFM ESP BHP
900 0.44 0.22
975 0.35 0.21 1050 0.24 0.20 1125 0.15 0.19 1200 0.08 0.19 1275 0.02 0.18 1350 --- --­1425 --- --­1500 --- ---
900 0.64 0.30
975 0.53 0.29 1050 0.42 0.28 1125 0.32 0.27 1200 0.24 0.26 1275 0.15 0.25 1350 0.07 0.24 1425 --- --­1500 --- ---
900 0.93 0.42
975 0.80 0.41 1050 0.68 0.39 1125 0.57 0.38 1200 0.47 0.37 1275 0.35 0.36 1350 0.26 0.34 1425 0.13 0.33 1500 0.08 0.32
900 1.04 0.47
975 0.92 0.46 1050 0.80 0.45 1125 0.71 0.45 1200 0.62 0.45 1275 0.52 0.44 1350 0.43 0.44 1425 0.27 0.42 1500 0.22 0.41
900 1.10 0.50
975 1.00 0.49 1050 0.90 0.49 1125 0.82 0.50 1200 0.75 0.51 1275 0.70 0.54 1350 0.67 0.57 1425 0.60 0.60 1500 0.62 0.64
72
APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE (cont.)
Table 27 – 548J*05A ELECTRIC DRIVE, X13 MOTOR, 4 TON HORIZONTAL SUPPLY
SPEED
(TORQUE)
TAP
1
2
3
4
5
CFM ESP BHP
1200 0.75 0.48 1300 0.63 0.46 1400 0.48 0.44 1500 0.33 0.41 1600 0.19 0.39 1700 0.05 0.36 1800 --- --­1900 --- --­2000 --- --­1200 0.97 0.58 1300 0.88 0.59 1400 0.77 0.59 1500 0.64 0.59 1600 0.50 0.57 1700 0.36 0.54 1800 0.21 0.52 1900 0.06 0.49 2000 --- --­1200 0.98 0.59 1300 0.91 0.60 1400 0.82 0.62 1500 0.71 0.62 1600 0.58 0.61 1700 0.45 0.60 1800 0.31 0.58 1900 0.16 0.56 2000 0.03 0.52 1200 0.98 0.59 1300 0.92 0.62 1400 0.86 0.64 1500 0.79 0.66 1600 0.70 0.68 1700 0.62 0.70 1800 0.52 0.71 1900 0.37 0.69 2000 0.21 0.67 1200 1.02 0.60 1300 0.97 0.64 1400 0.92 0.67 1500 0.87 0.71 1600 0.82 0.75 1700 0.77 0.79 1800 0.71 0.84 1900 0.65 0.88 2000 0.58 0.92
Table 28 – 548J*05A ELECTRIC DRIVE, X13 MOTOR, 4 TON VERTICAL SUPPLY
SPEED
(TORQUE)
TAP
1
2
3
4
5
CFM ESP BHP
1200 0.50 0.39 1300 0.36 0.37 1400 0.19 0.35 1500 0.10 0.33 1600 0.02 0.32 1700 --- --­1800 --- --­1900 --- --­2000 --- --­1200 0.80 0.55 1300 0.69 0.55 1400 0.50 0.54 1500 0.38 0.52 1600 0.24 0.50 1700 0.13 0.48 1800 0.01 0.46 1900 --- --­2000 --- --­1200 0.89 0.59 1300 0.78 0.61 1400 0.59 0.60 1500 0.46 0.58 1600 0.31 0.56 1700 0.20 0.54 1800 0.07 0.52 1900 --- --­2000 --- --­1200 0.89 0.60 1300 0.80 0.63 1400 0.67 0.64 1500 0.57 0.65 1600 0.43 0.65 1700 0.31 0.66 1800 0.23 0.65 1900 0.12 0.63 2000 0.01 0.62 1200 0.94 0.62 1300 0.85 0.65 1400 0.73 0.68 1500 0.65 0.70 1600 0.55 0.72 1700 0.47 0.75 1800 0.42 0.78 1900 0.39 0.82 2000 0.38 0.88
548J
73
APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE (cont.)
Table 29 – 548J*06A ELECTRIC DRIVE, X13 MOTOR, 5 TON HORIZONTAL SUPPLY
SPEED
(TORQUE)
TAP
1
548J
2
3
4
5
CFM ESP BHP
1500 1.19 0.74 1625 1.01 0.73 1750 0.82 0.70 1875 0.60 0.66 2000 0.38 0.62 2125 0.16 0.57 2250 --- --­2375 --- --­2500 --- --­1500 1.40 0.86 1625 1.25 0.88 1750 1.08 0.86 1875 0.90 0.84 2000 0.67 0.80 2125 0.44 0.75 2250 0.20 0.71 2375 --- --­2500 --- --­1500 1.41 0.87 1625 1.28 0.89 1750 1.13 0.89 1875 0.96 0.88 2000 0.74 0.85 2125 0.51 0.80 2250 0.27 0.75 2375 0.02 0.70 2500 --- --­1500 1.44 0.89 1625 1.35 0.93 1750 1.24 0.96 1875 1.11 0.98 2000 0.90 0.96 2125 0.69 0.92 2250 0.43 0.86 2375 0.17 0.81 2500 --- --­1500 1.49 0.90 1625 1.38 0.95 1750 1.28 1.00 1875 1.18 1.05 2000 1.11 1.09 2125 0.97 1.11 2250 0.72 1.07 2375 0.47 1.02 2500 0.20 0.96
Table 30 – 548J*06A ELECTRIC DRIVE, X13 MOTOR, 4 TON VERTICAL SUPPLY
SPEED
(TORQUE)
TAP
1
2
3
4
5
CFM ESP BHP
1500 1.00 0.70 1625 0.72 0.65 1750 0.46 0.60 1875 0.28 0.55 2000 0.14 0.51 2125 0.00 0.52 2250 --- --­2375 --- --­2500 --- --­1500 1.18 0.88 1625 1.00 0.90 1750 0.75 0.87 1875 0.51 0.83 2000 0.30 0.79 2125 0.13 0.75 2250 --- --­2375 --- --­2500 --- --­1500 1.19 0.88 1625 1.03 0.91 1750 0.80 0.90 1875 0.56 0.87 2000 0.35 0.83 2125 0.19 0.80 2250 0.01 0.77 2375 --- --­2500 --- --­1500 1.25 0.89 1625 1.09 0.93 1750 0.89 0.96 1875 0.65 0.94 2000 0.45 0.93 2125 0.26 0.89 2250 0.12 0.86 2375 --- --­2500 --- --­1500 1.26 0.90 1625 1.16 0.96 1750 0.99 1.01 1875 0.80 1.05 2000 0.67 1.07 2125 0.48 1.07 2250 0.26 1.03 2375 0.11 1.00 2500 --- ---
74
APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE (cont.)
Table 31 – 548J*04A 3 TON HORIZONTAL SUPPLY
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
CFM
900 574 0.13 707 0.23 817 0.34 913 0.47 999 0.61
975 597 0.15 727 0.25 835 0.37 929 0.50 1015 0.64 1050 621 0.18 747 0.28 853 0.40 946 0.53 1030 0.68 1125 646 0.20 768 0.31 872 0.43 964 0.57 1047 0.72 1200 671 0.23 790 0.34 892 0.47 982 0.61 1064 0.76 1275 696 0.26 812 0.38 912 0.51 1001 0.65 1082 0.81 1350 723 0.30 835 0.42 933 0.55 1020 0.70 1100 0.86 1425 749 0.34 859 0.46 955 0.60 1040 0.75 1119 0.91 1500 776 0.38 883 0.51 977 0.65 1061 0.80 1138 0.97
Med static High static
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
CFM
900 1078 0.77 1151 0.93 1220 1.11 1284 1.30 1346 1.49
975 1093 0.80 1165 0.97 1233 1.15 1297 1.33 1358 1.53 1050 1108 0.84 1180 1.01 1247 1.19 1311 1.38 1371 1.58 1125 1123 0.88 1195 1.05 1261 1.23 1325 1.42 1385 1.62 1200 1140 0.92 1210 1.10 1276 1.28 1339 1.47 1399 1.68 1275 1157 0.97 1226 1.15 1292 1.33 1354 1.53 1414 1.73 1350 1174 1.02 1243 1.20 1308 1.39 1370 1.59 1429 1.80 1425 1192 1.08 1260 1.26 1325 1.45 1386 1.65 1444 1.86 1500 1210 1.14 1278 1.33 1342 1.52 1403 1.72 1461 1.93
Med static High static
1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
Table 32 – 548J*04A 3 TON VERTICAL SUPPLY
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
CFM
900 594 0.15 740 0.25 867 0.37 981 0.52 1084 0.68
975 618 0.17 758 0.28 881 0.40 991 0.55 1092 0.71 1050 642 0.19 777 0.30 896 0.43 1003 0.58 1102 0.75 1125 668 0.22 797 0.34 912 0.47 1017 0.62 1113 0.79 1200 695 0.25 818 0.37 930 0.51 1032 0.66 1126 0.83 1275 722 0.29 841 0.41 949 0.55 1048 0.71 1140 0.88 1350 750 0.33 864 0.46 968 0.60 1065 0.76 1155 0.93 1425 778 0.37 888 0.50 989 0.65 1083 0.81 1171 0.99 1500 807 0.42 913 0.56 1011 0.71 1103 0.87 1188 1.05
Med static High static
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
548J
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
CFM
900 1180 0.86 1269 1.05 1354 1.25 1434 1.47 1511 1.70
975 1186 0.89 1275 1.08 1358 1.29 1437 1.51 1513 1.74 1050 1194 0.92 1281 1.12 1363 1.32 1441 1.54 1516 1.78 1125 1204 0.97 1289 1.16 1370 1.37 1447 1.59 1520 1.82 1200 1215 1.01 1298 1.21 1378 1.42 1454 1.64 1526 1.87 1275 1227 1.06 1309 1.26 1387 1.47 1462 1.69 1533 1.92 1350 1240 1.12 1321 1.32 1397 1.53 1471 1.75 1541 1.99 1425 1254 1.18 1333 1.38 1409 1.59 1481 1.82 1551 2.05 1500 1270 1.24 1347 1.45 1421 1.66 1492 1.89 1561 2.13
Med static High static
Bold Face indicates field --- supplied drive
1. Recommend using field---supplied fan pulley (part no. KR11AD561), motor pulley (part no. KR11HY181) and belt (part no. KR29AF041).
1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
75
APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE (cont.)
Table 33 – 548J*05A 4 TON HORIZONTAL SUPPLY
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
CFM
1200 671 0.23 790 0.34 892 0.47 982 0.61 1064 0.76 1300 705 0.28 820 0.39 919 0.52 1007 0.67 1088 0.82 1400 740 0.33 851 0.45 947 0.58 1034 0.73 1113 0.89 1500 776 0.38 883 0.51 977 0.65 1061 0.80 1138 0.97 1600 813 0.45 916 0.58 1007 0.73 1089 0.89 1165 1.05 1700 851 0.52 949 0.66 1038 0.81 1118 0.97 1192 1.15 1800 888 0.60 984 0.75 1069 0.90 1148 1.07 1221 1.25 1900 927 0.69 1019 0.84 1102 1.00 1179 1.18 1250 1.36 2000 965 0.78 1054 0.94 1135 1.11 1210 1.29 1280 1.48
Med static High static
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
548J
CFM
1200 1140 0.92 1210 1.10 1276 1.28 1339 1.47 1399 1.68 1300 1162 0.99 1232 1.16 1297 1.35 1360 1.55 1419 1.75 1400 1186 1.06 1254 1.24 1319 1.43 1381 1.63 1439 1.84 1500 1210 1.14 1278 1.33 1342 1.52 1403 1.72 1461 1.93 1600 1236 1.23 1302 1.42 1365 1.62 1425 1.82 1483 2.04 1700 1262 1.33 1328 1.52 1390 1.72 1449 1.93 1505 2.15 1800 1289 1.44 1354 1.63 1415 1.84 1473 2.05 1529 2.27 1900 1317 1.55 1380 1.75 1441 1.96 1498 2.18 --- --­2000 1345 1.68 1408 1.88 1467 2.10 1524 2.32 --- ---
Med static High static
Bold Face indicates field --- supplied drive
1. Recommend using field---supplied fan pulley (part no. KR11AD561), motor pulley (part no. KR11HY181) and belt (part no. KR29AF041).
1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
Table 34 – 548J*05A 4 TON VERTICAL SUPPLY
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
CFM
1200 695 0.25 818 0.37 930 0.51 1032 0.66 1126 0.83 1300 731 0.30 849 0.43 955 0.57 1053 0.72 1145 0.89 1400 769 0.36 880 0.49 982 0.63 1077 0.79 1166 0.97 1500 807 0.42 913 0.56 1011 0.71 1103 0.87 1188 1.05 1600 847 0.49 948 0.63 1042 0.79 1130 0.96 1213 1.14 1700 887 0.57 983 0.72 1073 0.88 1158 1.06 1239 1.24 1800 928 0.66 1020 0.82 1106 0.98 1188 1.16 1266 1.35 1900 969 0.76 1057 0.92 1140 1.09 1219 1.28 1295 1.48 2000 1010 0.87 1095 1.04 1175 1.21 1251 1.41 1325 1.61
Med static High static
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
CFM
1200 1215 1.01 1298 1.21 1378 1.42 1454 1.64 1526 1.87 1300 1231 1.08 1313 1.28 1390 1.49 1465 1.71 1536 1.94 1400 1249 1.16 1329 1.36 1405 1.57 1478 1.79 --- --­1500 1270 1.24 1347 1.45 1421 1.66 1492 1.89 --- --­1600 1292 1.34 1367 1.54 1440 1.76 1509 1.99 --- --­1700 1315 1.44 1389 1.65 1459 1.88 1527 2.11 --- --­1800 1341 1.56 1412 1.77 1481 2.00 --- --- --- --­1900 1367 1.68 1437 1.90 1504 2.13 --- --- --- --­2000 1395 1.82 1463 2.04 1528 2.28 --- --- --- ---
Med static High static
Bold Face indicates field --- supplied drive
1. Recommend using field---supplied fan pulley (part no. KR11AD561), motor pulley (part no. KR11HY181) and belt (part no. KR29AF041).
1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
76
APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE (cont.)
Table 35 – 548J*06A 5 TON HORIZONTAL SUPPLY
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
CFM
1500 725 0.33 840 0.46 937 0.60 1023 0.75 1101 0.90 1625 765 0.40 876 0.54 970 0.68 1054 0.84 1131 1.00 1750 806 0.48 912 0.63 1004 0.78 1087 0.94 1162 1.11 1875 847 0.57 950 0.72 1039 0.88 1120 1.05 1194 1.23 2000 889 0.66 988 0.83 1075 1.00 1154 1.18 1226 1.36 2125 931 0.78 1027 0.95 1112 1.13 1189 1.31 1260 1.50 2250 974 0.90 1067 1.08 1149 1.27 1224 1.46 1294 1.66 2375 1018 1.03 1107 1.23 1187 1.43 1261 1.63 1329 1.84 2500 1061 1.19 1148 1.39 1226 1.59 1297 1.81 1364 2.02
Med static High static
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
CFM
1500 1172 1.06 1239 1.23 1302 1.40 1361 1.58 1418 1.77 1625 1201 1.16 1267 1.34 1329 1.52 1388 1.71 1444 1.90 1750 1231 1.28 1296 1.46 1358 1.65 1416 1.84 1472 2.04 1875 1262 1.41 1326 1.60 1387 1.79 1445 1.99 1499 2.20 2000 1294 1.55 1357 1.74 1417 1.95 1474 2.15 1528 2.36 2125 1326 1.70 1388 1.90 1447 2.11 1504 2.33 1557 2.55 2250 1359 1.87 1420 2.08 1479 2.29 1534 2.51 1587 2.74 2375 1393 2.05 1453 2.27 1511 2.49 1566 2.72 1618 2.95 2500 1427 2.24 1487 2.47 1543 2.70 1597 2.94 1649 3.18
Med static High static
1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
Table 36 – 548J*06A 5 TON VERTICAL SUPPLY
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
CFM
1500 794 0.41 902 0.55 993 0.69 1074 0.85 1147 1.00 1625 840 0.49 945 0.64 1034 0.80 1113 0.96 1185 1.13 1750 888 0.59 988 0.75 1075 0.92 1153 1.09 1223 1.26 1875 936 0.70 1033 0.87 1117 1.05 1193 1.23 1263 1.41 2000 984 0.82 1078 1.00 1160 1.19 1235 1.39 1303 1.58 2125 1033 0.96 1124 1.15 1204 1.35 1277 1.56 1343 1.76 2250 1083 1.11 1170 1.32 1248 1.53 1319 1.74 1385 1.96 2375 1133 1.28 1217 1.50 1293 1.72 1363 1.95 1427 2.17 2500 1183 1.47 1265 1.70 1339 1.93 1406 2.17 1470 2.41
Med static High static
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
548J
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
CFM
1500 1214 1.16 1277 1.33 1336 1.50 1392 1.67 1445 1.85 1625 1251 1.30 1313 1.47 1371 1.65 1427 1.83 1479 2.02 1750 1289 1.44 1350 1.63 1407 1.81 1462 2.01 1514 2.20 1875 1327 1.60 1387 1.80 1444 1.99 1498 2.19 1550 2.40 2000 1366 1.78 1426 1.98 1482 2.19 1535 2.40 1586 2.61 2125 1406 1.97 1464 2.18 1520 2.40 1573 2.62 1623 2.84 2250 1446 2.18 1504 2.40 1559 2.62 1611 2.85 1661 3.09 2375 1487 2.40 1544 2.63 1598 2.87 1650 3.11 --- --­2500 1529 2.64 1585 2.89 1638 3.13 --- --- --- ---
Med static High static
1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
77
APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE (cont.)
Table 37 – 548J*07A 6 TON HORIZONTAL SUPPLY
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
CFM
1800 822 0.51 927 0.66 1018 0.82 1100 0.98 1174 1.15 1950 872 0.62 973 0.79 1061 0.95 1140 1.13 1213 1.31 2100 923 0.75 1019 0.92 1104 1.10 1182 1.29 1253 1.48 2250 974 0.90 1067 1.08 1149 1.27 1224 1.46 1294 1.66 2400 1026 1.06 1115 1.26 1195 1.46 1268 1.66 1336 1.87 2550 1079 1.25 1164 1.46 1241 1.67 1312 1.88 1379 2.10 2700 1132 1.46 1214 1.67 1289 1.90 1358 2.12 1422 2.35 2850 1186 1.69 1264 1.92 1336 2.15 1404 2.39 1467 2.63 3000 1240 1.94 1315 2.18 1385 2.43 1451 2.68 1512 2.93
Std static Med static High static
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
548J
CFM
1800 1244 1.33 1308 1.51 1369 1.70 1427 1.90 1483 2.10 1950 1281 1.49 1345 1.68 1405 1.88 1462 2.09 1517 2.30 2100 1320 1.67 1382 1.87 1441 2.08 1498 2.29 1552 2.51 2250 1359 1.87 1420 2.08 1479 2.29 1534 2.51 1587 2.74 2400 1400 2.09 1460 2.31 1517 2.53 1572 2.76 1624 2.99 2550 1441 2.33 1500 2.55 1557 2.79 1610 3.03 1662 3.27 2700 1483 2.59 1541 2.83 1597 3.07 1650 3.32 --- --­2850 1527 2.87 1583 3.12 1638 3.37 --- --- --- --­3000 1571 3.18 1626 3.44 1680 3.70 --- --- --- ---
Std static Med static High static
1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
Table 38 – 548J*07A 6 TON VERTICAL SUPPLY
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
CFM
1800 907 0.63 1006 0.80 1092 0.97 1169 1.14 1239 1.32 1950 965 0.77 1060 0.95 1143 1.13 1218 1.32 1287 1.51 2100 1024 0.93 1115 1.12 1195 1.32 1268 1.52 1335 1.72 2250 1083 1.11 1170 1.32 1248 1.53 1319 1.74 1385 1.96 2400 1143 1.32 1227 1.54 1302 1.76 1371 1.99 1435 2.22 2550 1203 1.55 1284 1.78 1357 2.02 1424 2.26 1487 2.50 2700 1264 1.81 1342 2.06 1412 2.31 1478 2.56 1539 2.82 2850 1326 2.09 1400 2.36 1469 2.62 1532 2.89 1592 3.16 3000 1387 2.41 1459 2.69 1525 2.97 1587 3.25 1646 3.53
Std static Med static High static
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
CFM
1800 1304 1.51 1365 1.69 1422 1.88 1477 2.08 1528 2.28 1950 1350 1.71 1410 1.91 1467 2.11 1520 2.31 1572 2.52 2100 1398 1.93 1457 2.14 1512 2.35 1565 2.57 1616 2.79 2250 1446 2.18 1504 2.40 1559 2.62 1611 2.85 1661 3.09 2400 1496 2.45 1552 2.68 1606 2.92 1658 3.16 --- --­2550 1546 2.75 1601 2.99 1654 3.24 --- --- --- --­2700 1597 3.07 1651 3.33 --- --- --- --- --- --­2850 1648 3 . 4 3 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --­3000 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
Std static Med static High static
1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
78
APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE (cont.)
Table 39 – 548J*08D 7.5 TON HORIZONTAL SUPPLY
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
CFM
2250 423 0.28 509 0.40 587 0.52 659 0.66 725 0.80 2438 444 0.34 525 0.46 600 0.59 669 0.73 733 0.88 2625 465 0.40 543 0.53 614 0.67 680 0.82 743 0.97 2813 487 0.47 561 0.61 629 0.76 693 0.91 753 1.08 3000 510 0.55 580 0.70 646 0.86 707 1.02 765 1.19 3188 534 0.65 600 0.80 663 0.96 722 1.13 779 1.31 3375 557 0.75 621 0.91 681 1.08 738 1.26 793 1.44 3563 582 0.86 642 1.03 700 1.21 755 1.39 808 1.58 3750 606 0.99 664 1.17 720 1.35 773 1.54 824 1.74
Std static Med static High static
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
CFM
2250 788 0.94 847 1.09 903 1.25 957 1.41 1009 1.58 2438 794 1.03 852 1.19 907 1.36 959 1.52 1010 1.70 2625 802 1.13 858 1.30 911 1.47 963 1.64 1012 1.82 2813 811 1.24 865 1.41 917 1.59 967 1.77 1016 1.96 3000 821 1.36 874 1.54 925 1.72 974 1.91 1021 2.11 3188 832 1.49 884 1.68 933 1.87 981 2.06 1028 2.26 3375 845 1.63 895 1.82 943 2.02 990 2.22 1035 2.43 3563 858 1.78 907 1.98 954 2.19 1000 2.40 1044 2.61 3750 873 1.94 920 2.15 966 2.36 1011 2.58 1054 2.80
Std static Med static High static
1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
Table 40 – 548J*08D 7.5 TON VERTICAL SUPPLY
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
CFM
2250 447 0.31 528 0.43 597 0.54 658 0.66 713 0.78 2438 470 0.37 548 0.50 615 0.62 675 0.75 729 0.88 2625 494 0.45 569 0.58 634 0.71 692 0.85 745 0.99 2813 518 0.53 590 0.67 653 0.82 710 0.96 763 1.11 3000 543 0.62 612 0.77 673 0.93 729 1.08 780 1.24 3188 568 0.72 635 0.89 694 1.05 749 1.21 799 1.38 3375 593 0.84 658 1.01 716 1.19 769 1.36 818 1.53 3563 619 0.97 681 1.15 737 1.33 789 1.52 837 1.70 3750 645 1.11 705 1.30 760 1.49 810 1.68 857 1.88
Std static Med static High static
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
548J
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
CFM
2250 764 0.89 812 1.02 856 1.14 899 1.26 939 1.39 2438 779 1.00 826 1.13 870 1.26 912 1.40 952 1.53 2625 795 1.12 841 1.26 885 1.40 926 1.54 966 1.68 2813 811 1.25 857 1.40 900 1.55 941 1.69 980 1.84 3000 828 1.39 873 1.55 916 1.70 956 1.86 995 2.02 3188 846 1.54 890 1.71 932 1.87 972 2.04 1010 2.21 3375 864 1.70 907 1.88 949 2.05 988 2.23 1026 2.40 3563 882 1.88 925 2.06 966 2.25 1005 2.43 1042 2.62 3750 902 2.07 944 2.26 984 2.45 1022 2.65 1059 2.84
Std static Med static High static
1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
79
APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE (cont.)
Table 41 – 548J*09D 8.5 TON HORIZONTAL SUPPLY
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
CFM
2550 468 0.39 546 0.52 618 0.66 684 0.80 747 0.96 2763 493 0.47 567 0.61 635 0.76 699 0.91 760 1.07 2975 520 0.57 589 0.72 654 0.87 716 1.03 774 1.20 3188 547 0.68 613 0.83 675 1.00 733 1.17 789 1.34 3400 575 0.80 637 0.96 696 1.14 752 1.31 806 1.50 3613 603 0.94 662 1.11 719 1.29 773 1.48 824 1.67 3825 631 1.09 688 1.27 742 1.46 794 1.66 843 1.86 4038 660 1.26 714 1.45 766 1.65 816 1.85 864 2.06 4250 689 1.45 741 1.65 790 1.86 838 2.07 885 2.29
Std static Med static High static
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
548J
CFM
2550 806 1.11 863 1.28 916 1.45 968 1.62 1018 1.80 2763 817 1.24 871 1.41 924 1.59 974 1.77 1022 1.95 2975 829 1.37 882 1.55 932 1.74 981 1.93 1028 2.12 3188 843 1.53 894 1.71 943 1.90 990 2.10 1036 2.30 3400 858 1.69 907 1.88 955 2.09 1001 2.29 1046 2.50 3613 874 1.87 922 2.07 968 2.28 1013 2.49 1057 2.71 3825 891 2.07 938 2.28 983 2.49 1027 2.71 1069 2.94 4038 910 2.28 955 2.50 999 2.72 1041 2.95 1083 3.19 4250 930 2.51 973 2.74 1015 2.97 1057 3.21 1097 3.45
Std static Med static High static
1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
Table 42 – 548J*09D 8.5 VERTICAL SUPPLY
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
CFM
2550 495 0.43 570 0.56 634 0.70 693 0.83 746 0.96 2763 524 0.53 595 0.67 657 0.81 714 0.95 766 1.09 2975 552 0.63 620 0.79 681 0.94 736 1.09 787 1.24 3188 582 0.76 647 0.92 705 1.08 759 1.25 808 1.41 3400 611 0.89 674 1.07 730 1.24 782 1.42 831 1.59 3613 641 1.05 701 1.23 756 1.42 806 1.60 854 1.79 3825 672 1.22 729 1.42 782 1.61 831 1.81 877 2.00 4038 702 1.41 758 1.62 809 1.83 857 2.03 901 2.24 4250 733 1.62 787 1.84 836 2.06 883 2.28 926 2.49
Std static Med static High static
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
AVAILABLEEXTERNALSTATICPRESSURE(IN.WG)
CFM
2550 795 1.09 841 1.23 885 1.36 926 1.50 965 1.64 2763 814 1.24 859 1.38 902 1.53 943 1.68 982 1.82 2975 834 1.40 878 1.55 921 1.71 961 1.86 999 2.02 3188 855 1.57 898 1.74 940 1.90 979 2.07 1017 2.24 3400 876 1.76 919 1.94 960 2.12 998 2.29 1036 2.47 3613 898 1.97 940 2.16 980 2.34 1018 2.53 1055 2.72 3825 921 2.20 962 2.40 1001 2.59 1039 2.79 1075 2.99 4038 944 2.45 984 2.65 1023 2.86 1060 3.07 1096 3.27 4250 968 2.71 1007 2.93 1045 3.15 1081 3.36 1117 3.58
Std static Med static High static
1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP
80
APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE (cont.)
Table 43 – PULLEY ADJUSTMENT
Unit Motor/Drive Combo
04
3phase
05
3phase
06
3phase
07
3phase
08
3phase
09
3phase
Medium Static 1251 1208 1165 1121 1078 1035 992 949 905 862 819
High Static 1466 1423 1380 1337 1294 1251 1207 1164 1121 1078 1035
Medium Static 1303 1265 1226 1188 1150 1112 1073 1035 997 958 920
High Static 1466 1423 1380 1337 1294 1251 1207 1164 1121 1078 1035
Medium Static 1380 1349 1317 1286 1254 1223 1192 1160 1129 1097 1066
High Static 1639 1596 1553 1510 1467 1424 1380 1337 1294 1251 1208
Standard Static 1192 1161 1129 1098 1066 1035 1004 972 941 909 878
Medium Static 1380 1349 1317 1286 1254 1223 1192 1160 1129 1097 1066
High Static 1639 1596 1553 1510 1467 1424 1380 1337 1294 1251 1208
Standard Static 652 633 614 594 575 556 537 518 498 479 460
Medium Static 838 813 789 764 739 715 690 665 640 616 591
High Static 1084 1059 1035 1010 986 961 936 912 887 863 838
Standard Static 652 633 614 594 575 556 537 518 498 479 460
Medium Static 838 813 789 764 739 715 690 665 640 616 591
High Static 1084 1059 1035 1010 986 961 936 912 887 863 838
NOTE: Do not adjust pulley further than 5 turns open.
--- F ac to ry s e t t i n g s
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
Motor Pulley turns open
548J
81
APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL INFORMA TION
Table 44 – 548J*04A 1--Stage Cooling 3 TONS
VO LTA GE
V--Ph--Hz
208--1--60 187 253 17.9 112 190 0.9 DD--STD 980 7.8 84% 7.4 230--1--60 187 253 17.9 112 190 0.9 DD--STD 980 7.8 84% 7.4
208--3--60 187 253 13.2 88 190 0.9
230--3--60 187 253 13.2 88 190 0.9
460--3--60 414 506 6.0 44 190 0.5
RANGE
MIN MAX RLA LRA WATTS FLA TYPE
548J
575--3--60 518 633 NA NA 190 0.4
COMP (ea) OFM (ea) IFM
Max
WATTS
DD--STD 980 7.8 84% 7.4
MED 2000 5.5 80% 5.2
HIGH 2000 5.5 80% 5.2
DD--STD 980 7.8 84% 7.4
MED 2000 5.5 80% 5.2
HIGH 2000 5.5 80% 5.2
DD--STD 980 8.0 84% 7.6
MED 2000 2.7 80% 2.6
HIGH 2000 2.7 80% 2.6
DD--STD 980 4.2 84% 4.0
MED 2000 2.5 80% 2.4
HIGH 2000 2.1 80% 2.0
Max
AMP Draw
EFF at Full Load FLA
Table 45 – 548J*05A 1--Stage Cooling 4 TONS
VO LTA GE
V--Ph--Hz
208--1--60 187 253 21.8 117 325 1.5 D D --- S TD 980 7.8 84% 7.4 230--1--60 187 253 21.8 117 325 1.5 D D --- S TD 980 7.8 84% 7.4
208--3--60 187 253 13.7 83 325 1.5
230--3--60 187 253 13.7 83 325 1.5
460--3--60 414 506 6.2 41 325 0.8
575--3--60 518 633 4.8 37 325 0.6
RANGE
MIN MAX RLA LRA WATTS FLA TYPE
COMP (ea) OFM (ea) IFM
Max
WATTS
D D --- S T D 980 7.8 84% 7.4
MED 2000 5.5 80% 5.2
HIGH 2000 5.5 80% 5.2
D D --- S T D 980 7.8 84% 7.4
MED 2000 5.5 80% 5.2
HIGH 2000 5.5 80% 5.2
D D --- S T D 980 8.0 84% 7.6
MED 2000 2.7 80% 2.6
HIGH 2000 2.7 80% 2.6
D D --- S T D 980 4.2 84% 4.0
MED 2000 2.5 80% 2.4
HIGH 2000 2.1 80% 2.0
Max
AMP Draw
EFF at Full Load FLA
Table 46 – 548J*06A 1--Stage Cooling 5 TONS
VOLTAGE
V --- P h --- H z
2 0 8 --- 1 --- 6 0 187 253 26.2 134 325 1.5 D D --- S T D 980 7.8 84% 7.4 2 3 0 --- 1 --- 6 0 187 253 26.2 134 325 1.5 D D --- S T D 980 7.8 84% 7.4
2 0 8 --- 3 --- 6 0 187 253 15.6 110 325 1.5
2 3 0 --- 3 --- 6 0 187 253 15.6 110 325 1.5
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0 414 506 7.7 52 325 0.8
5 7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0 518 633 5.8 39 325 0.6
RANGE
MIN MAX RLA LRA WAT TS FLA TYPE
COMP (ea) OFM (ea) IFM
Max
WATTS
D D --- S T D 980 7.8 84% 7.4
MED 2000 5.5 80% 5.2
HIGH 2770 7.9 81% 7.5
D D --- S T D 980 7.8 84% 7.4
MED 2000 5.5 80% 5.2
HIGH 2770 7.9 81% 7.5
D D --- S T D 980 8.0 84% 7.6
MED 2000 2.7 80% 2.6
HIGH 2770 3.6 81% 3.4
D D --- S T D 980 4.2 84% 4.0
MED 2000 2.1 80% 2.0
HIGH 2770 2.9 81% 2.8
Max
AMP Draw
82
EFF at Full Load FLA
APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL INFORMA T ION (cont.)
Table 47 – 548J*07A 1--Stage Cooling 6 TONS
VOLTAGE
V --- P h --- H z
2 0 8 --- 3 --- 6 0 187 253 19.0 123 325 1.5
2 3 0 --- 3 --- 6 0 187 253 19.0 123 325 1.5
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0 414 506 9.7 62 325 0.8
5 7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0 518 633 7.4 50 325 0.6
RANGE
MIN MAX
COMP (ea) OFM (ea) IFM
RLA LRA WATTS FLA TYPE
STD 1600 5.5 80% 5.2
MED 2770 7.9 81% 7.5
HIGH 2770 7.9 81% 7.5
STD 1600 5.5 80% 5.2
MED 2770 7.9 81% 7.5
HIGH 2770 7.9 81% 7.5
STD 1600 2.7 80% 2.6
MED 2770 3.6 81% 3.4
HIGH 2770 3.6 81% 3.4
STD 1600 2.5 80% 2.4
MED 2770 2.9 81% 2.8
HIGH 2770 2.9 81% 2.8
Max
WATTS
Max
AMP Draw
EFF at Full Load FLA
Table 48 – 548J*08D 2--Stage Cooling 7.5 TONS
VOLTAGE
V --- P h --- H z
2 0 8 --- 3 --- 6 0 187 253 13.1 83 13.1 83 325 1.5
2 3 0 --- 3 --- 6 0 187 253 13.1 83 13.1 83 325 1.5
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0 414 506 6.1 41 6.1 41 325 0.8
5 7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0 518 633 4.4 33 4.4 33 325 0.6
RANGE
MIN MAX
COMP (Cir 1) COMP (Cir 2) OFM (ea) IFM
RLA LRA RLA LRA WATTS FLA TYPE
STD 1310 5.5 80% 5.2
MED 2770 7.9 81% 7.5
HIGH 2770 7.9 81% 7.5
STD 1310 5.5 80% 5.2
MED 2770 7.9 81% 7.5
HIGH 2770 7.9 81% 7.5
STD 1310 2.7 80% 2.6
MED 2770 3.6 81% 3.4
HIGH 2770 3.6 81% 3.4
STD 1310 2.5 80% 2.4
MED 2770 2.9 81% 2.8
HIGH 2770 2.9 81% 2.8
Max
WATTS
Max AMP Draw
EFF at
Full
Load
548J
FLA
Table 49 – 548J*09D 2--Stage Cooling 8.5 TONS
VOLTAGE
V --- P h --- H z
2 0 8 --- 3 --- 6 0 187 253 16.0 91 13.7 83 325 1.5
2 3 0 --- 3 --- 6 0 187 253 16.0 91 13.7 83 325 1.5
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0 414 506 7.0 46 6.2 41 325 0.8
5 7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0 518 633 5.6 37 4.8 37 325 0.6
RANGE
MIN MAX
COMP (Cir 1) COMP (Cir 2) OFM (ea) IFM
RLA LRA RLA LRA WATTS FLA TYPE
STD 1310 5.5 80% 5.2
MED 2770 7.9 80% 7.5
HIGH 2770 7.9 80% 7.5
STD 1310 5.5 80% 5.2
MED 2770 7.9 80% 7.5
HIGH 2770 7.9 80% 7.5
STD 1310 2.7 80% 2.6
MED 2770 3.6 80% 3.4
HIGH 2770 3.6 80% 3.4
STD 1310 2.5 80% 2.4
MED 2770 2.9 80% 2.8
HIGH 2770 2.9 81% 2.8
Max
WATTS
Max AMP Draw
83
EFF at
Full
Load
FLA
APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL INFORMA T ION (cont.)
Table 50 – Unit Wire/MOCP Sizing Data
ELECTRIC HEATER NO C.O. or UNPWRD C.O.
548J
UNIT
548J*04A
IFM
TYPE
N O M . V --- P H --- H Z
STD
208/230---1---60
STD
MED
208/230---3---60
HIGH
STD
MED
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
HIGH
STD --- --- 5.4 15 5 5 7.4 20 15 7
MED --- --- 3.4 15 3 8 5.4 20 15 10
7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
HIGH --- --- 2.9 15 3 12 4.9 20 15 14
Nom
(kW)
--- --- 30.7 45 30 121 32.6 50 32 123
3.3/4.4 15.9/18.3 50.6/53.6 60/60 48/51 137/139 52.5/55.5 60/60 51/53 139/141
4.9/6.5 23.5/27.1 60.1/64.6 70/70 57/61 145/148 62.0/66.5 70/70 59/63 147/150
6.5/8.7 31.4/36.3 69.9/76.1 70/80 66/72 152/157 71.8/78.0 80/80 68/74 154/159
7.9/10.5 37.9/43.8 78.1/85.4 80/90 74/81 159/165 80.0/87.3 80/90 76/83 161/167
9.8/13.0 46.9/54.2 89.3/98.4 90/100 84/92 215/229 91.2/100.3 100/110 86/95 217/231
--- --- 24.8 30 25 97 26.7 30 27 99
3.3/4.4 9.2/10.6 36.3/38.1 45/45 35/37 106/108 38.2/40.0 45/50 37/39 108/110
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 41.8/44.3 50/50 40/43 111/113 43.7/46.2 50/50 43/45 113/115
6.5/8.7 18.1/20.9 47.4/50.9 50/60 46/49 115/118 49.3/52.8 50/60 48/51 117/120
7.9/10.5 21.9/25.3 52.2/56.4 60/60 50/54 119/122 54.1/58.3 60/60 52/56 121/124
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 66.6/72.9 70/80 63/69 130/136 68.5/74.8 70/80 65/71 132/138
--- --- 22.6 30 22 109 24.5 30 24 111
3.3/4.4 9.2/10.6 34.1/35.9 45/45 33/34 118/120 36.0/37.8 45/45 35/37 120/122
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 39.6/42.1 45/50 38/40 123/125 41.5/44.0 50/50 40/42 125/127
6.5/8.7 18.1/20.9 45.2/48.7 50/50 43/46 127/130 47.1/50.6 50/60 45/48 129/132
7.9/10.5 21.9/25.3 50.0/54.2 50/60 47/51 131/134 51.9/56.1 60/60 50/53 133/136
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 64.4/70.7 70/80 61/66 142/148 66.3/72.6 70/80 63/69 144/150
--- --- 22.6 30 22 120 24.5 30 24 122
3.3/4.4 9.2/10.6 34.1/35.9 45/45 33/34 129/131 36.0/37.8 45/45 35/37 131/133
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 39.6/42.1 45/50 38/40 134/136 41.5/44.0 50/50 40/42 136/138
6.5/8.7 18.1/20.9 45.2/48.7 50/50 43/46 138/141 47.1/50.6 50/60 45/48 140/143
7.9/10.5 21.9/25.3 50.0/54.2 50/60 47/51 142/145 51.9/56.1 60/60 50/53 144/147
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 64.4/70.7 70/80 61/66 153/159 66.3/72.6 70/80 63/69 155/161
--- --- 16.0 20 16 53 17.0 20 17 54
6.0 7.2 25.0 30 24 60 26.0 30 26 61
8.8 10.6 29.3 30 28 64 30.3 35 30 65
11.5 13.8 33.3 35 32 67 34.3 35 33 68
14.0 16.8 37.0 40 36 70 38.0 40 37 71
--- --- 10.6 15 10 54 11.6 15 12 55
6.0 7.2 19.6 20 19 61 20.6 25 20 62
8.8 10.6 23.9 25 23 65 24.9 25 24 66
11.5 13.8 27.9 30 26 68 28.9 30 27 69
14.0 16.8 31.6 35 30 71 32.6 35 31 72
--- --- 10.6 15 10 60 11.6 15 12 61
6.0 7.2 19.6 20 19 67 20.6 25 20 68
8.8 10.6 23.9 25 23 71 24.9 25 24 72
11.5 13.8 27.9 30 26 74 28.9 30 27 75
14.0 16.8 31.6 35 30 77 32.6 35 31 78
FLA
MCA MOCP
NO P.E. w/ P.E. (pwrd fr/unit)
DISC. SIZE
MCA MOCP
FLA LRA FLA LRA
DISC. SIZE
NOTE: See page 96 for table legend and notes.
84
APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL INFORMA T ION (cont.)
Table 50 — Unit Wire/MOCP Sizing Data (cont)
ELECTRIC HEATER w/ PWRD C.O.
UNIT
548J*04A
IFM
TYPE
N O M . V --- P H --- H Z
STD
208/230---1---60
STD
MED
208/230---3---60
HIGH
STD
MED
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
HIGH
STD --- --- 7.1 15 7 7 9.5 15 9 9
MED --- --- 5.1 15 5 10 7.5 15 7 12
7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
HIGH --- --- 4.6 15 5 14 7.0 15 7 16
Nom
(kW)
--- --- 35.5 50 36 126 37.4 50 38 128
3.3/4.4 15.9/18.3 55.4/58.4 60/60 54/57 142/144 57.3/60.3 60/70 56/59 144/146
4.9/6.5 23.5/27.1 64.9/69.4 70/80 63/67 150/153 66.8/71.3 70/80 65/69 152/155
6.5/8.7 31.4/36.3 74.7/80.9 80/90 72/77 157/162 76.6/82.8 80/90 74/80 159/164
7.9/10.5 37.9/43.8 82.9.90.2 90/100 79/86 164/170 84.8/92.1 90/100 81/88 166/172
9.8/13.0 46.9/54.2 94.1/103.2 100/110 90/98 220/234 96.0/105.1 100/110 92/100 222/236
--- --- 29.6 40 30 102 31.5 40 32 104
3.3/4.4 9.2/10.6 41.1/42.9 50/50 41/42 111/113 43.0/44.8 50/50 43/45 113/115
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 46.6/49.1 50/50 46/48 116/118 48.5/51.0 50/60 48/50 118/120
6.5/8.7 18.1/20.9 52.2/55.7 60/60 51/54 120/123 54.1/57.6 60/60 53/56 122/125
7.9/10.5 21.9/25.3 57.0/61.2 60/70 55/59 124/127 58.9/63.1 60/70 58/62 126/129
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 71.4/77.7 80/80 69/75 135/141 73.3/79.6 80/80 71/77 137/143
--- --- 27.4 40 28 114 29.3 40 30 116
3.3/4.4 9.2/10.6 38.9/40.7 45/50 38/40 123/125 40.8/42.6 50/50 40/42 125/127
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 44.4/46.9 50/50 43/46 128/130 46.3/48.8 50/50 46/48 130/132
6.5/8.7 18.1/20.9 50.0/53.5 60/60 49/52 132/135 51.9/55.4 60/60 51.54 134/137
7.9/10.5 21.9/25.3 54.8/59.0 60/60 53/57 136/139 56.7/60.9 60/70 55/59 138/141
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 69.2/75.5 70/80 66/72 147/153 71.1/77.4 80/80 68/74 149/155
--- --- 27.4 40 28 125 29.3 40 30 127
3.3/4.4 9.2/10.6 38.9/40.7 45/50 38/40 134/136 40.8/42.6 50/50 40/42 136/138
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 44.4/46.9 50/50 43/46 139/141 46.3/48.8 50/50 46/48 141/143
6.5/8.7 18.1/20.9 50.0/53.5 60/60 49/52 143/146 51.9/55.4 60/60 51/54 145/148
7.9/10.5 21.9/25.3 54.8/59.0 60/60 53/57 147/150 56.7/60.9 60/70 55/59 149/152
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 69.2/75.5 70/80 66/72 158/164 71.1/77.4 80/80 68/74 160/166
--- --- 18.2 25 19 55 19.2 25 20 56
6.0 7.2 27.2 30 27 62 28.2 30 28 63
8.8 10.6 31.5 35 31 66 32.5 35 32 67
11.5 13.8 35.5 40 35 69 36.5 40 36 70
14.0 16.8 39.2 40 38 72 40.2 45 39 73
--- --- 12.8 15 13 56 13.8 20 14 57
6.0 7.2 21.8 25 21 63 22.8 25 22 64
8.8 10.6 26.1 30 25 67 27.1 30 26 68
11.5 13.8 30.1 35 29 70 31.1 35 30 71
14.0 16.8 33.8 35 32 73 34.8 35 33 74
--- --- 12.8 15 13 62 13.8 20 14 63
6.0 7.2 21.8 25 21 69 22.8 25 22 70
8.8 10.6 26.1 30 25 73 27.1 30 26 74
11.5 13.8 30.1 35 29 76 31.1 35 30 77
14.0 16.8 33.8 35 32 79 34.8 35 33 80
FLA
MCA MOCP
NO P.E. w/ P.E. (pwrd fr/unit)
DISC. SIZE
MCA MOCP
FLA LRA FLA LRA
DISC. SIZE
548J
NOTE: See page 96 for table legend and notes.
85
APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL INFORMA T ION (cont.)
Table 50 — Unit Wire/MOCP Sizing Data (cont)
ELECTRIC HEATER NO C.O. or UNPWRD C.O.
548J
UNIT
548J*05A
IFM
TYPE
N O M . V --- P H --- H Z
STD
208/230---1---60
STD
208/230---3---60
MED
208/230---3---60
HIGH
STD
MED
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
HIGH
STD --- --- 10.6 15 11 43 12.5 15 13 45
MED --- --- 9.0 15 9 46 10.9 15 11 48
7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
HIGH --- --- 8.6 15 9 50 10.5 15 11 52
Nom
(kW)
--- --- 36.2 50 35 128 38.1 50 37 130
3.3/4.4 15.9/18.3 56.0/59.0 60/60 54/56 144/146 57.9/60.9 60/70 56/59 146/148
6.5/8.7 31.4/36.3 75.4/81.5 80/90 71/77 159/164 77.3/83.4 80/90 74/79 161/166
9.8/13.0 46.9/54.2 94.8/103.9 100/110 89/98 222/236 96.7/105.8 100/110 91/100 224/238
13.1/17.4 62.8/72.5 114.7/126.8 125/150 108/119 254/273 166.6/128.7 125/150 110/121 256/275
15.821.0 75.8/87.5 130.9/145.5 150/150 122/136 280/303 132.8/147.4 150/150 125/138 282/305
--- --- 26.0 30 26 94 27.9 40 28 96
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 43.0/45.5 50/50 42/44 108/110 44.9/47.4 50/50 44/46 110/112
6.5/8.7 18.1.20.9 48.7/52.2 50/60 47/50 112/115 50.6/54.1 60/60 49/52 114/117
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 67.8/74.2 70/80 64/70 127/133 69.7/76.1 70/80 67/72 129/135
15.8/21.0 43.8/50.5 80.8/98.2 90/90 76/84 182/195 82.7/91.1 90/100 79/86 184/197
--- --- 23.8 30 23 106 25.7 30 26 108
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 40.8/43.3 50/50 39/41 120/122 42.7/45.2 50/50 41/44 122/124
6.5/8.7 18.1.20.9 46.5/50.0 50/50 44/47 124/127 48.4/51.9 50/60 46/50 126/129
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 65.6/72.0 70/80 62/68 139/145 67.5/73.9 70/80 64/70 141/147
15.8/21.0 43.8/50.5 78.6/87.0 80/90 74/82 194/207 80.5/88.9 90/90 76/84 196/209
--- --- 23.8 30 23 117 25.7 30 26 119
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 40.8/43.3 50/50 39/41 131/133 42.7/45.2 50/50 41/44 133/135
6.5/8.7 18.1.20.9 46.5/50.0 50/50 44/47 135/138 48.4/51.9 50/60 46/50 137/140
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 65.6/72.0 70/80 62/68 150/156 67.5/73.9 70/80 64/70 152/158
15.8/21.0 43.8/50.5 78.6/87.0 80/90 74/82 202/218 80.5/88.9 90/90 76/84 207/220
--- --- 16.5 20 17 51 17.5 25 18 52
6.0 7.2 25.5 30 25 58 26.5 30 26 59
11.5 13.8 33.8 35 33 65 34.8 35 34 66
14.0 16.8 37.5 40 36 68 38.5 40 37 69
23.0 27.7 51.1 60 49 106 52.1 60 50 107
--- --- 11.2 15 11 52 12.2 15 12 53
6.0 7.2 20.2 25 19 59 21.2 25 20 60
11.5 13.8 28.4 30 27 66 29.4 30 28 67
14.0 16.8 32.2 35 30 69 33.2 35 32 70
23.0 27.7 45.8 50 43 107 46.8 50 44 108
--- --- 11.2 15 11 58 12.2 15 12 59
6.0 7.2 20.2 25 19 65 21.2 25 20 66
11.5 13.8 28.4 30 27 72 29.4 30 28 73
14.0 16.8 32.2 35 30 75 33.2 35 32 76
23.0 27.7 45.8 50 43 113 46.8 50 44 114
FLA
MCA MOCP
NO P.E. w/ P.E. (pwrd fr/unit)
DISC. SIZE
MCA MOCP
FLA LRA FLA LRA
DISC. SIZE
NOTE: See page 96 for table legend and notes.
86
APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL INFORMA T ION (cont.)
Table 50 — Unit Wire/MOCP Sizing Data (cont)
ELECTRIC HEATER w/ PWRD C.O.
UNIT
548J*05A
IFM
TYPE
N O M . V --- P H --- H Z
STD
208/230---1---60
STD
MED
208/230---3---60
HIGH
STD
MED
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
HIGH
STD --- --- 12.3 15 13 45 14.2 20 15 47
MED --- --- 10.7 15 11 48 12.6 15 13 50
7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
HIGH --- --- 10.3 15 10 52 12.2 15 13 54
Nom
(kW)
--- --- 41.0 60 41 133 42.9 60 43 135
3.3/4.4 15.9/18.3 60.8/63.8 70/80 59/62 149/151 62.7/65.7 80/80 61/64 151/153
6.5/8.7 31.4/36.3 80.2/86.3 90/90 77/83 164/169 82.1/88.2 90/100 79/85 166/171
9.8/13.0 46.9/54.2 99.6/108.7 100/110 95/103 227/241 101.5/110.6 110/125 97/105 229/243
13.1/17.4 62.8/72.5 119.5/131.6 125/150 113/124 259/278 121.4/133.5 125/150 115/126 261/280
15.821.0 75.8/87.5 135.7/150.3 150/175 128/141 285/308 137.6/152.2 150/175 130/144 287/310
--- --- 30.8 40 32 99 32.7 45 34 102
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 47.8/50.3 50/60 47/49 113/115 49.7/52.5 60/60 49/52 115/117
6.5/8.7 18.1.20.9 53.5/57.0 60/60 52/56 117/120 55.4/58.9 60/60 55/58 119/122
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 72.6/79.0 80/80 70/76 132/138 74.5/80.9 80/90 72/78 134/140
15.8/21.0 43.8/50.5 85.6/94.0 90/100 82/90 187/200 87.5/95.9 90/100 84/92 189/202
--- --- 28.6 40 29 111 30.5 40 31 113
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 45.6/48.1 50/50 45/47 125/127 47.5/50.0 50/60 47/49 127/129
6.5/8.7 18.1.20.9 51.3/54.8 60/60 50/53 129/132 53.2/56.7 60/60 52/55 131/134
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 70.4/76.8 80/80 67/73 144/150 72.3/78.7 80/80 70/75 146/152
15.8/21.0 43.8/50.5 83.4/91.8 90/100 79/87 199/212 85.3/93.7 90/100 82/89 201/214
--- --- 28.6 40 29 122 30.5 40 31 124
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 45.6/48.1 50/60 45/47 136/138 47.5/50.0 50/60 47/49 138/140
6.5/8.7 18.1.20.9 51.3/54.8 60/60 50/53 140/143 53.2/56.7 60/60 52/55 142/145
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 70.4/76.8 80/80 67/73 155/161 72.3/78.7 80/80 70/75 157/163
15.8/21.0 43.8/50.5 83.4/91.8 80/90 79/87 210/223 85.3/93.7 90/100 82/89 212/225
--- --- 18.7 25 19 53 19.7 25 20 54
6.0 7.2 27.7 30 28 60 28.7 30 29 61
11.5 13.8 36.0 40 35 67 37.0 40 36 68
14.0 16.8 39.7 40 39 70 40.7 45 40 71
23.0 27.7 53.3 60 51 108 54.3 60 52 109
--- --- 13.4 15 14 54 14.4 20 15 55
6.0 7.2 22.4 25 22 61 23.4 25 23 62
11.5 13.8 30.6 35 29 68 31.6 35 31 69
14.0 16.8 34.4 35 33 71 35.4 40 34 72
23.0 27.7 48.0 50 45 109 49.0 50 47 110
--- --- 13.4 15 14 60 14.4 20 15 61
6.0 7.2 22.4 25 22 67 23.4 25 23 68
11.5 13.8 30.6 35 29 74 31.6 35 31 75
14.0 16.8 34.4 35 33 77 35.4 40 34 78
23.0 27.7 48.0 50 45 115 49.0 50 47 116
FLA
MCA MOCP
NO P.E. w/ P.E. (pwrd fr/unit)
DISC. SIZE
MCA MOCP
FLA LRA FLA LRA
DISC. SIZE
548J
NOTE: See page 96 for table legend and notes.
87
APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL INFORMA T ION (cont.)
Table 50 — Unit Wire/MOCP Sizing Data (cont)
ELECTRIC HEATER NO C.O. or UNPWRD C.O.
548J
UNIT
548J*06A
IFM
TYPE
N O M . V --- P H --- H Z
STD
208/230---1---60
STD
MED
208/230---3---60
HIGH
STD
MED
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
HIGH
STD --- --- 11.9 15 12 45 13.8 20 14 47
MED --- --- 9.9 15 10 52 11.8 15 12 54
7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
HIGH --- --- 10.7 15 11 63 12.6 15 13 65
Nom
(kW)
--- --- 41.7 60 40 145 43.6 60 43 147
4.9/6.5 23.5/27.1 71.0/75.5 80/80 67/72 169/172 72.9/77.4 80/80 70/74 171/174
6.5/8.7 31.4/36.3 80.9/87.0 90/100 76/82 176/181 82.8/88.9 100/100 79/84 178/183
9.8/13.0 46.9/54.2 100.3/109.4 110/110 94/103 239/253 102.2/111.3 110/125 96/105 241/255
13.1/17.4 62.8/72.5 120.2/132.3 125/150 113/124 271/290 122.1/134.2 125/150 115/126 273/292
15.821.0 75.8/87.5 136.4/151.0 150/175 128/141 297/320 138.3/152.9 150/175 130/143 299/322
--- --- 28.4 40 28 121 30.3 45 30 123
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 45.4/47.9 50/50 44/46 135/137 47.3/49.8 50/60 46/48 137/139
7.9/10.5 21.9/25.3 55.8/60.0 60/70 53/57 143/146 57.7/61.9 60/70 56/59 145/148
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 70.2/76.5 80/80 67/72 154/160 72.1/78.4 80/80 69/75 156/162
15.8/21.0 43.8/50.5 83.2/91.5 90/100 79/86 209/222 85.1/93.4 90/100 81/88 211/224
19.9/26.5 55.2/63.8 97.4/108.2 100/110 92/102 231/249 99.3/110.1 100/125 94/104 233/251
--- --- 26.2 40 26 144 28.1 40 28 146
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 43.2/45.7 50/50 41/44 158/160 45.1/47.6 50/50 43/46 160/162
7.9/10.5 21.9/25.3 53.6/57.8 60/60 51/55 166/169 55.5/59.7 60/60 53/57 168/171
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 68.0/74.3 70/80 64/70 177/183 69.9/76.2 70/80 66/72 179/185
15.8/21.0 43.8/50.5 81.0/89.3 90/90 76/84 232/245 82.9/91.2 90/100 78/86 234/247
19.9/26.5 55.2/63.8 95.2/106.0 100/110 89/99 254/272 97.1/107.9 100/110 91/101 256/274
--- --- 28.5 40 28 170 30.4 45 30 172
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 45.5/48.0 50/50 44/46 184/186 47.4/49.9 50/60 46/48 186/188
7.9/10.5 21.9/25.3 55.9/60.1 60/70 53/57 192/195 57.8/62.0 60/70 56/60 194/197
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 70.3/76.6 80/90 67/73 203/209 72.2/78.5 80/80 69/75 205/211
15.8/21.0 43.8/50.5 83.3/91.6 90/100 79/86 258/271 85.2/93.5 90/100 81/89 260/273
19.9/26.5 55.2/63.8 97.5/108.3 100/110 92/102 280/298 99.4/110.2 100/125 94/104 282/300
--- --- 18.0 25 19 62 19.0 25 20 63
6.0 7.2 27.0 30 27 69 28.0 30 28 70
11.5 13.8 35.3 40 34 76 36.3 40 36 77
14.0 16.8 39.0 40 38 79 40.0 45 39 80
23.0 27.7 52.7 60 50 117 53.7 60 52 118
25.5 30.7 56.4 60 54 123 57.4 60 55 124
--- --- 13.0 20 13 69 14.0 20 14 70
6.0 7.2 22.0 25 21 76 23.0 25 22 77
11.5 13.8 30.3 35 29 83 31.3 35 30 84
14.0 16.8 34.0 35 32 86 35.0 40 33 87
23.0 27.7 47.7 50 45 124 48.7 50 46 125
25.5 30.7 51.4 50 48 130 52.4 60 49 131
--- --- 13.8 20 14 82 14.8 20 15 83
6.0 7.2 22.8 25 22 89 23.8 25 23 90
11.5 13.8 31.1 35 30 96 32.1 35 31 97
14.0 16.8 34.8 35 33 99 35.8 40 34 100
23.0 27.7 48.5 50 46 137 49.5 50 47 138
25.5 30.7 52.2 60 49 143 53.2 60 50 144
FLA
MCA MOCP
NO P.E. w/ P.E. (pwrd fr/unit)
DISC. SIZE
MCA MOCP
FLA LRA FLA LRA
DISC. SIZE
NOTE: See page 96 for table legend and notes.
88
APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL INFORMA T ION (cont.)
Table 50 — Unit Wire/MOCP Sizing Data (cont)
ELECTRIC HEATER w/ PWRD C.O.
UNIT
548J*06A
IFM
TYPE
N O M . V --- P H --- H Z
STD
208/230---1---60
STD
MED
208/230---3---60
HIGH
STD
MED
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
HIGH
STD --- --- 13.6 15 14 47 15.5 20 16 49
MED --- --- 11.6 15 12 54 13.5 15 14 56
7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
HIGH --- --- 12.4 15 13 65 14.3 20 15 67
Nom
(kW)
--- --- 46.5 60 46 150 48.4 60 48 152
4.9/6.5 23.5/27.1 75.8/80.3 80/90 73/77 174/177 77.7/82.2 80/100 75/79 176/179
6.5/8.7 31.4/36.3 85.7/91.8 100/100 82/88 181/186 87.7/93.7 100/100 84/90 183/188
9.8/13.0 46.9/54.2 105.1/114.2 110/125 100/108 244/258 107.0/116.1 110/125 102/110 246/260
13.1/17.4 62.8/72.5 125.0/137.1 125/150 118/129 276/295 126.9/139.0 150/150 120/131 278/297
15.821.0 75.8/87.5 141.2/155.8 150/175 133/147 302/325 143.1/157.7 150/175 135/149 304/327
--- --- 33.2 45 34 126 35.1 50 36 128
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 50.2/52.7 60/60 49/52 140/142 52.1/54.6 60/60 52/54 142/144
7.9/10.5 21.9/25.3 60.6/64.8 70/70 59/63 148/151 62.5/66.7 70/70 61/65 150/153
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 75.0/81.3 80/90 72/78 159/165 76.9/83.2 80/90 74/80 161/167
15.8/21.0 43.8/50.5 88.0/96.3 90/100 84/92 214/227 89.9/98.2 90/100 86/94 216/229
19.9/26.5 55.2/63.8 102.2/113.0 110/125 97/107 236/254 104.1/114.9 110/125 99/109 238/256
--- --- 31.0 45 31 149 32.9 45 33 151
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 48.0/50.5 60/60 47/49 163/165 49.9/52.4 60/60 49/51 165/167
7.9/10.5 21.9/25.3 58.4/62.6 60/70 56/60 171/174 60.3/64.5 70/70 59/62 173/176
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 72.8/79.1 80/80 70/75 182/188 74.7/81.0 80/90 72/78 184/190
15.8/21.0 43.8/50.5 85.8/94.1 90/100 82/89 237/250 87.7/96.0 90/100 84/91 239/252
19.9/26.5 55.2/63.8 100.0/110.8 100/125 95/105 259/277 101.9/112.7 110/125 97/107 261/279
--- --- 33.3 45 34 175 35.2 50 36 177
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 50.3/52.8 60/60 49/52 189/191 52.2/54.7 60/60 52/54 191/193
7.9/10.5 21.9/25.3 60.7/64.9 70/70 59/63 197/200 62.6/66.8 70/70 61/65 199/202
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 75.1/81.4 80/90 72/78 208/214 77.0/83.3 80/90 74/80 210/216
15.8/21.0 43.8/50.5 88.1/96.4 90/100 84/92 263/276 90.0/98.3 90/100 86/94 265/278
19.9/26.5 55.2/63.8 102.3/113.1 110/125 97/107 285/303 104.2/115.0 110/125 99/109 287/305
--- --- 20.2 25 21 64 21.2 25 22 65
6.0 7.2 29.2 30 29 71 30.2 35 30 72
11.5 13.8 37.5 40 37 78 38.5 40 38 78
14.0 16.8 41.2 45 40 81 42.2 45 42 82
23.0 27.7 54.9 60 53 119 55.9 60 54 120
25.5 30.7 58.6 60 56 125 59.6 60 58 126
--- --- 15.2 20 15 71 16.2 20 16 72
6.0 7.2 24.2 30 24 78 25.2 30 25 79
11.5 13.8 32.5 35 31 85 33.5 35 32 86
14.0 16.8 36.2 40 35 88 37.2 40 36 89
23.0 27.7 49.9 50 47 126 50.9 60 48 127
25.5 30.7 53.6 60 51 132 54.6 60 52 133
--- --- 16.0 20 16 84 17.0 20 17 85
6.0 7.2 25.0 30 24 91 26.0 30 26 92
11.5 13.8 33.3 35 32 98 34.3 35 33 99
14.0 16.8 37.0 40 36 101 38.0 40 37 102
23.0 27.7 50.7 60 48 139 51.7 60 49 140
25.5 30.7 54.4 60 52 145 55.4 60 53 146
FLA
MCA MOCP
NO P.E. w/ P.E. (pwrd fr/unit)
DISC. SIZE
MCA MOCP
FLA LRA FLA LRA
DISC. SIZE
548J
NOTE: See page 96 for table legend and notes.
89
APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL INFORMA T ION (cont.)
Table 50 — Unit Wire/MOCP Sizing Data (cont)
ELECTRIC HEATER NO C.O. or UNPWRD C.O.
548J
UNIT
548J*07A
IFM
TYPE
N O M . V --- P H --- H Z
STD
MED
208/230---3---60
HIGH
STD
MED
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
HIGH
STD --- --- 12.3 15 12 59 14.2 20 14 61
MED --- --- 12.7 20 12 74 14.6 20 15 76
7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
HIGH --- --- 12.7 20 12 74 14.6 20 15 76
Nom
(kW)
--- --- 30.5 45 30 146 32.4 50 32 148
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 47.5/50.0 60/60 45/47 160/162 49.4/51.9 60/60 47/50 162/164
7.9/10.5 21.9/25.3 57.8/62.1 60/70 55/59 168/171 59.7/64.0 60/70 57/61 170/173
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 72.2/78.6 80/80 68/74 179/185 74.1/80.5 80/90 70/76 181/187
15.8/21.0 43.8/50.5 85.2/93.6 90/100 80/88 234/247 87.1/95.5 90/100 82/90 236/249
19.9/26.5 55.2/63.8 99.5/110.2 100/125 93/103 256/274 101.4/112.1 110/125 95/105 258/276
--- --- 32.8 50 32 183 34.7 50 34 185
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 49.8/52.3 60/60 48/50 197/199 51.5/54.2 60/60 50/52 199/201
7.9/10.5 21.9/25.3 60.1/64.4 70/70 57/61 205/208 62.0/66.3 70/70 60/63 207/210
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 74.5/80.9 80/90 71/76 216/222 76.4/82.8 80/90 73/79 218/224
15.8/21.0 43.8/50.5 87.5/95.9 90/100 83/90 271/284 89.4/97.8 90/100 85/92 273/286
19.9/26.5 55.2/63.8 101.8/112.5 110/125 96/106 293/311 103.7/114.4 110/125 98/108 295/313
--- --- 32.8 50 32 183 34.7 50 34 185
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 49.8/52.3 60/60 48/50 197/199 51.7/54.2 60/60 50/52 199/201
7.9/10.5 21.9/25.3 60.1/64.4 70/70 57/61 205/208 62.0/66.3 70/70 60/63 207/210
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 74.5/80.9 80/90 71/76 216/222 76.4/82.8 80/80 73/79 218/224
15.8/21.0 43.8/50.5 87.5/95.9 90/100 83/90 271/284 89.4/97.8 90/100 85/92 273/286
19.9/26.5 55.2/63.8 101.8/112.5 110/125 96/106 293/311 103.7/114.4 110/125 98/108 295/313
--- --- 15.5 25 15 73 16.5 25 16 74
6.0 7.2 24.4 30 23 80 25.5 30 24 81
11.5 13.8 32.8 35 31 87 33.8 40 32 88
14.0 16.8 36.5 40 34 90 37.5 40 36 91
23.0 27.7 50.2 60 47 128 51.2 60 48 129
25.5 30.7 53.9 60 50 134 54.9 60 52 135
--- --- 16.3 25 16 92 17.3 25 17 93
6.0 7.2 25.3 30 24 99 26.3 30 25 100
11.5 13.8 33.6 35 32 106 34.6 40 33 107
14.0 16.8 37.3 40 35 109 38.3 40 36 110
23.0 27.7 51.0 60 48 147 52.0 60 49 148
25.5 30.7 54.7 60 51 153 55.7 60 52 154
--- --- 16.3 25 16 92 17.3 25 17 93
6.0 7.2 25.3 30 24 99 26.3 30 25 100
11.5 13.8 33.6 35 32 106 34.6 40 33 107
14.0 16.8 37.3 40 35 109 38.3 40 36 110
23.0 27.7 51.0 60 48 147 52.0 60 49 148
25.5 30.7 54.7 60 51 153 55.7 60 52 154
FLA
MCA MOCP
NO P.E. w/ P.E. (pwrd fr/unit)
DISC. SIZE
MCA MOCP
FLA LRA FLA LRA
DISC. SIZE
NOTE: See page 96 for table legend and notes.
90
APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL INFORMA T ION (cont.)
Table 50 — Unit Wire/MOCP Sizing Data (cont)
ELECTRIC HEATER w/ PWRD C.O.
UNIT
548J*07A
IFM
TYPE
N O M . V --- P H --- H Z
STD
MED
208/230---3---60
HIGH
STD
MED
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
HIGH
STD --- --- 14.0 20 14 61 15.9 20 16 63
MED --- --- 14.4 20 14 76 16.3 20 17 78
7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
HIGH --- --- 14.4 20 14 76 16.3 20 17 78
Nom
(kW)
--- --- 35.3 50 35 151 37.2 50 37 153
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 52.3/54.8 60/60 51/53 165/167 54.2/56.7 60/60 53/55 167/169
7.9/10.5 21.9/25.3 62.6/66.9 70/70 60/64 173/176 64.5/68.8 70/80 62/66 175/178
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 77.0/83.4 80/90 73/79 184/190 78.9/85.3 80/90 76/82 186/192
15.8/21.0 43.8/50.5 90.0/98.4 90/100 85/93 239/252 91.9/100.3 100/110 88/95 241/254
19.9/26.5 55.2/63.8 104.3.115.0 110/125 99/108 261/279 106.2/116.9 110/125 101/111 263/281
--- --- 37.6 50 38 188 39.5 50 40 190
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 54.6/57.1 60/60 53/56 202/204 56.5/59.0 60/60 56/58 204/206
7.9/10.5 21.9/25.3 64.9/69.2 70/80 63/67 210/213 66.8/71.1 80/80 65/69 212/215
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 79.3/85.7 80/90 76/82 221/227 81.2/87.6 90/90 78/84 223/229
15.8/21.0 43.8/50.5 92.3/100.7 100/110 88/96 276/289 94.2/102.6 100/110 90/98 278/291
19.9/26.5 55.2/63.8 106.6/117.3 110/125 101/111 298/316 108.5/119.2 110/125 103/113 300/318
--- --- 37.6 50 38 188 39.5 50 40 190
4.9/6.5 13.6/15.6 54.6/57.1 60/60 53/56 202/204 56.5/59.0 60/60 56/58 204/206
7.9/10.5 21.9/25.3 64.9/69.2 70/80 63/67 210/213 66.8/71.1 80/80 65/69 212/215
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 79.3/85.7 80/90 76/82 221/227 81.2/87.6 90/90 78/84 223/229
15.8/21.0 43.8/50.5 92.3/100.7 100/110 88/96 276/289 94.2/102.6 100/110 90/98 278/291
19.9/26.5 55.2/63.8 106.6/117.3 110/125 101/111 298/316 108.5/119.2 110/125 103/113 300/318
--- --- 17.7 25 18 75 18.7 25 19 76
6.0 7.2 26.7 30 26 82 27.7 30 27 83
11.5 13.8 35.0 40 33 89 36.0 40 35 90
14.0 16.8 38.7 40 37 92 39.7 45 38 93
23.0 27.7 52.4 60 49 130 53.4 60 51 131
25.5 30.7 56.1 60 53 136 57.1 60 54 137
--- --- 18.5 25 19 94 19.5 25 20 95
6.0 7.2 27.5 30 27 101 28.5 30 28 102
11.5 13.8 35.8 40 34 108 36.8 40 36 109
14.0 16.8 39.5 45 38 111 40.5 45 39 112
23.0 27.7 53.2 60 50 149 54.2 60 52 150
25.5 30.7 56.9 60 54 155 57.9 60 55 156
--- --- 18.5 25 19 94 19.5 25 20 95
6.0 7.2 27.5 30 27 101 28.5 30 28 102
11.5 13.8 35.8 40 34 108 36.8 40 36 109
14.0 16.8 39.5 45 38 111 40.5 45 39 112
23.0 27.7 53.2 60 50 149 54.2 60 52 150
25.5 30.7 56.9 60 54 155 57.9 60 55 156
FLA
MCA MOCP
NO P.E. w/ P.E. (pwrd fr/unit)
DISC. SIZE
MCA MOCP
FLA LRA FLA LRA
DISC. SIZE
548J
NOTE: See page 96 for table legend and notes.
91
APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL INFORMA T ION (cont.)
Table 50 — Unit Wire/MOCP Sizing Data (cont)
ELECTRIC HEATER NO C.O. or UNPWRD C.O.
548J
UNIT
548J*08D
N O M . V --- P H --- H Z
208/230---3---60
5 7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
IFM
TYPE
STD
MED
HIGH
STD
MED
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
HIGH
STD
MED
HIGH
Nom
(kW)
--- --- 37.7 50 40 193 41.5 50 44 197
7.8/10.4 21.7/25.0 64.8/68.9 70/70 65/68 215/218 68.6/72.7 70/80 69/73 219/222
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 79.4/85.8 80/90 78/84 226/232 83.2/89.6 90/90 82/88 230/236
18.6/24.8 51.7/59.7 102.3/112.3 110/125 99/108 245/253 106.1/116.1 110/125 103/113 249/257
24.0/32.0 66.7/77.0 121.1/133.9 125/150 116/128 260/270 124.9/137.7 125/150 121/132 264/274
31.8/42.4 88.4/102.0 148.2/165.2 150/175 141/157 370/397 152.0/169.0 175/175 146/161 374/401
--- --- 40.0 50 42 230 43.8 50 47 234
7.8/10.4 21.7/25.0 67.1/71.2 70/80 67/71 252/255 70.9/75.0 80/80 72/75 256/259
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 81.7/88.1 90/90 81/86 263/269 85.5/91.9 90/100 85/91 267/273
18.6/24.8 51.7/59.7 104.6/114.6 110/125 102/111 282/290 108.4/118.4 110/125 106/115 286/294
24.0/32.0 66.7/77.0 123.4/136.2 125/150 119/131 297/307 127.2/140.0 150/150 123/135 301/311
31.8/42.4 88.4/102.0 150.5/167.5 175/175 144/160 407/434 154.3/171.3 175/175 148/164 411/438
--- --- 40.0 50 42 230 43.8 50 47 234
7.8/10.4 21.7/25.0 67.1/71.2 70/80 67/71 252/255 70.9/75.0 80/80 72/75 256/259
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 81.7/88.1 90/90 81/86 263/269 85.5/91.9 90/100 85/91 267/273
18.6/24.8 51.7/59.7 104.6/114.6 110/125 102/111 282/290 108.4/118.4 110/125 106/115 286/294
24.0/32.0 66.7/77.0 123.4/136.2 125/150 119/131 297/307 127.2/140.0 150/150 123/135 301/311
31.8/42.4 88.4/102.0 150.5/167.5 175/175 144.160 407/434 154.3/171.3 175/175 148/164 411/438
--- --- 17.9 20 19 95 19.7 25 21 97
13.9 16.7 38.8 40 38 112 40.6 45 40 114
16.5 19.8 42.7 45 42 115 44.5 45 44 117
27.8 33.4 59.7 60 57 128 61.5 70 59 130
33.0 39.7 67.6 70 65 135 69.4 70 67 137
41.7 50.2 80.7 90 77 195 82.5 90 79 197
--- --- 18.7 25 20 114 20.5 25 22 116
13.9 16.7 39.6 40 39 131 41.4 45 41 133
16.5 19.8 43.5 45 43 134 45.3 50 45 136
27.8 33.4 60.5 70 58 147 62.3 70 60 149
33.0 39.7 68.4 70 65 154 70.2 80 68 156
41.7 50.2 81.5 90 78 214 83.3 90 80 216
--- --- 18.7 25 20 114 20.5 25 26 129
13.9 16.7 39.6 40 39 131 41.4 45 30 129
16.5 19.8 43.5 45 43 134 45.3 50 33 129
27.8 33.4 60.5 70 58 147 62.3 70 49 129
33.0 39.7 68.4 70 65 154 70.2 80 56 129
41.7 50.2 81.5 90 78 214 83.3 90 68 129
--- --- 13.5 15 14 77 17.3 20 19 81
17.0 20.4 39.0 40 38 97 42.8 45 42 101
34.0 40.9 64.6 70 62 118 68.4 70 66 122
--- --- 13.9 20 15 92 17.7 20 19 96
17.0 20.4 39.4 40 38 112 43.2 45 43 116
34.0 40.9 65.0 70 50 133 68.8 70 66 137
--- --- 13.9 20 15 92 17.7 20 19 96
17.0 20.4 39.4 40 38 112 43.2 45 43 116
34.0 40.9 65.0 70 62 133 68.8 70 66 137
FLA
MCA MOCP
NO P.E. w/ P.E. (pwrd fr/unit)
DISC. SIZE
MCA MOCP
FLA LRA FLA LRA
DISC. SIZE
NOTE: See page 96 for table legend and notes.
92
APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL INFORMA T ION (cont.)
Table 50 — Unit Wire/MOCP Sizing Data (cont)
ELECTRIC HEATER w/PWRD C.O.
UNIT
548J*08D
N O M . V --- P H --- H Z
208/230---3---60
5 7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
IFM
TYPE
STD
MED
HIGH
STD
MED
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
HIGH
STD
MED
HIGH
Nom (kW)
--- --- 42.5 50 45 198 48.3 50 49 202
7.8/10.4 21.7/25.0 69.6/73.7 70/80 70/74 220/223 73.4/77.5 80/80 74/78 224/227
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 84.2/90.6 90/100 83/89 231/237 88.0/94.4 90/100 88/94 235/241
18.6/24.8 51.7/59.7 107.1/117.1 110/125 105/114 250/258 110.9/120.9 125/125 109/118 254/262
24.0/32.0 66.7/77.0 125.9/138.7 150/150 122/134 265/275 129.7/142.5 150/150 126/138 269/279
31.8/42.4 88.4/102.0 153.0/170.0 175/175 147/162 375/402 156.8/173.8 175/175 151/167 379/406
--- --- 44.8 50 48 235 48.6 60 52 239
7.8/10.4 21.7/25.0 71.9/76.0 80/80 73/76 257/260 75.7/79.8 80/80 77/81 261/264
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 86.5/92.9 90/100 86/92 268/274 90.3/96.7 100/100 91/96 272/278
18.6/24.8 51.7/59.7 109.4/119.4 110/125 107/116 287/295 113.2/123.2 125/125 112/121 291/299
24.0/32.0 66.7/77.0 128.2/141.0 150/150 124/136 302/312 132.0/144.8 150/150 129/141 306/316
31.8/42.4 88.4/102.0 155.3/172.3 175/175 149/165 412/439 159.1/176.1 175/200 154/169 416/443
--- --- 44.8 50 48 235 48.6 60 52 239
7.8/10.4 21.7/25.0 71.9/76.0 80/80 73/76 257/260 75.7/79.8 80/80 77/81 261/264
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 86.5/92.9 90/100 86/92 268/274 90.3/96.7 100/100 91/96 272/278
18.6/24.8 51.7/59.7 109.4/119.4 110/125 107/116 287/295 113.2/123.2 125/125 112/121 291/299
24.0/32.0 66.7/77.0 128.2/141.0 150/150 124/136 302/312 132.0/144.8 150/150 129/141 306/316
31.8/42.4 88.4/102.0 155.3/172.3 175/175 149/165 412/439 159.1/176.1 175/200 154/169 416/443
--- --- 20.1 25 21 97 21.9 25 23 99
13.9 16.7 41.0 45 41 114 42.8 45 43 116
16.5 19.8 44.9 45 44 117 46.7 50 46 119
27.8 33.4 61.9 70 60 130 63.7 70 62 132
33.0 39.7 69.8 70 67 137 71.6 80 69 139
41.7 50.2 82.9 90 79 197 84.7 90 81 199
--- --- 20.9 25 22 116 22.7 25 24 118
13.9 16.7 41.8 45 42 133 43.6 45 44 135
16.5 19.8 45.7 50 45 136 47.5 50 47 138
27.8 33.4 62.7 70 61 149 64.5 70 63 151
33.0 39.7 70.6 80 68 156 72.4 80 70 158
41.7 50.2 83.7 90 80 216 85.5 90 82 218
--- --- 20.9 25 22 116 22.7 25 24 118
13.9 16.7 41.8 45 42 133 43.6 45 44 135
16.5 19.8 45.7 50 45 136 47.5 50 47 138
27.8 33.4 62.7 70 61 149 64.5 70 63 151
33.0 39.7 70.6 80 68 156 72.4 80 70 158
41.7 50.2 83.7 90 80 216 85.5 90 82 218
--- --- 15.2 20 16 79 19.0 25 21 83
17.0 20.4 40.7 45 40 99 44.5 45 44 103
34.0 40.9 66.3 70 63 120 70.1 80 68 124
--- --- 15.6 20 17 94 19.4 25 21 98
17.0 20.4 41.1 45 40 114 44.9 45 45 118
34.0 40.9 66.7 70 64 135 70.5 80 68 139
--- --- 15.6 20 17 94 19.4 25 21 98
17.0 20.4 41.1 45 40 114 44.9 45 45 118
34.0 40.9 66.7 70 64 135 70.1 80 68 139
FLA
MCA MOCP
NO P.E. w/ P.E. (pwrd fr/unit)
DISC. SIZE
MCA MOCP
FLA LRA FLA LRA
DISC. SIZE
548J
NOTE: See page 96 for table legend and notes.
93
APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL INFORMA T ION (cont.)
Table 50 — Unit Wire/MOCP Sizing Data (cont)
ELECTRIC HEATER NO C.O. or UNPWRD C.O.
548J
UNIT
548J*09D
N O M . V --- P H --- H Z
208/230---3---60
5 7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
IFM
TYPE
STD
MED
HIGH
STD
MED
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
HIGH
STD
MED
HIGH
Nom
(kW)
--- --- 41.9 50 44 201 45.7 60 48 205
7.8/10.4 21.7/25.0 69.0/73.2 70/80 69/72 223/226 72.8/77.0 80/80 73/77 227/230
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 83.7/90.0 90/100 82/88 234/240 87.5/03.8 90/100 86/92 238/244
18.6/24.8 51.7/59.7 106.5/116.5 110/125 103/112 253/261 110/3/120.3 125/125 107/117 257/265
24.0/32.0 66.7/77.0 125.3/138.2 150/150 120/132 268/278 129.1/140.0 150/150 125/137 272/282
31.8/42.4 88.4/102.0 152.4/169.4 175/175 145/161 378/405 156.2/173.2 175/175 150/165 382/409
--- --- 44.2 60 48 238 48.0 60 51 242
7.8/10.4 21.7/25.0 71.3/75.5 80/80 71/75 260/263 75.1/79.3 80/80 76/79 264/267
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 86.0/92.3 90/100 85/91 271/277 89.8/96.1 90/100 89/95 275/281
18.6/24.8 51.7/59.7 108.8/118.8 110/125 106/115 290/298 112.6/122.6 125/125 110/119 294/302
24.0/32.0 66.7/77.0 127.6/140.5 150/150 123/135 305/315 131.3/144.3 150/150 127/139 309/319
31.8/42.4 88.4/102.0 154.7/171.7 175/175 148/164 415/442 158.5/175.5 175/200 152/168 419/446
--- --- 44.2 60 48 238 48.0 60 51 242
7.8/10.4 21.7/25.0 71.3/75.5 80/80 71/75 260/263 75.1/79.3 80/80 76/79 264/267
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 86.0/92.3 90/100 85/91 271/277 89.8/96.1 90/100 89/95 275/281
18.6/24.8 51.7/59.7 108.8/118.8 110/125 106/115 290/298 112.6/122.6 125/125 110/119 294/302
24.0/32.0 66.7/77.0 127.6/140.5 150/150 123/135 305/315 131.3/144.3 150/150 127/139 309/319
31.8/42.4 88.4/102.0 154.7/171.7 175/175 148/164 415/442 158.5/175.5 175/200 152/168 419/446
--- --- 19.2 25 20 100 21.0 25 22 102
13.9 16.7 40.0 45 39 117 41.8 45 41 119
16.5 19.8 43.9 45 43 120 45.7 50 45 122
27.8 33.4 60.9 70 58 133 62.7 70 60 135
33.0 39.7 68.8 70 66 140 70.6 80 68 142
41.7 50.2 81.9 90 78 200 83.7 90 80 202
--- --- 20.0 25 21 119 21.8 25 23 121
13.9 16.7 40.8 45 40 136 42.6 45 42 138
16.5 19.8 44.7 45 44 139 46.5 50 46 141
27.8 33.4 61.7 70 59 152 63.5 70 61 154
33.0 39.7 69.6 70 67 159 71.4 80 69 161
41.7 50.2 82.7 90 79 219 84.5 90 81 221
--- --- 20.0 25 21 119 21.8 25 23 121
13.9 16.7 40.8 45 40 136 42.6 45 42 138
16.5 19.8 44.7 45 44 139 46.5 50 46 141
27.8 33.4 61.7 70 59 152 63.5 70 61 154
33.0 39.7 69.6 70 67 159 71.4 80 69 161
41.7 50.2 81.9 90 79 219 84.5 90 81 221
--- --- 15.4 20 16 85 19.2 25 20 89
17.0 20.4 40.9 45 40 105 44.7 45 44 109
34.0 40.9 66.5 70 63 126 70.3 80 68 130
--- --- 15.8 20 17 100 19.6 25 21 104
17.0 20.4 41.3 45 40 120 45.1 50 44 124
34.0 40.9 66.9 70 64 141 70.7 80 68 145
--- --- 15.8 20 17 100 19.6 25 21 104
17.0 20.4 41.3 45 40 120 45.1 50 44 124
34.0 40.9 66.9 70 64 141 70.7 80 68 145
FLA
MCA MOCP
NO P.E. w/ P.E. (pwrd fr/unit)
DISC. SIZE
MCA MOCP
FLA LRA FLA LRA
DISC. SIZE
NOTE: See page 96 for table legend and notes.
94
APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL INFORMA T ION (cont.)
Table 50 — Unit Wire/MOCP Sizing Data (cont)
ELECTRIC HEATER w/PWRD C.O.
UNIT
548J*09D
N O M . V --- P H --- H Z
208/230---3---60
5 7 5 --- 3 --- 6 0
IFM
TYPE
STD
MED
HIGH
STD
MED
4 6 0 --- 3 --- 6 0
HIGH
STD
MED
HIGH
Nom (kW)
--- --- 46.7 60 49 206 50.5 60 53 210
7.8/10.4 21.7/25.0 73.8/78.0 80/80 74/78 228/231 77.6/81.8 80/90 78/82 232/235
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 88.5/94.8 90/100 88/93 239/245 92.3/98.6 100/100 92/98 243/249
18.6/24.8 51.7/59.7 111.3/121.3 125/125 109/118 258/266 115.1/125.1 125/150 113/122 262/270
24.0/32.0 66.7/77.0 130.1/143.0 150/150 126/138 273/283 133.9/146.8 150/150 130/142 277/287
31.8/42.4 88.4/102.0 157.2/174.2 175/175 151/166 383/410 161.0/178.0 175/200 155/171 387/414
--- --- 49.0 60 52 243 52.8 60 56 247
7.8/10.4 21.7/25.0 76.1/80.3 80/90 77/81 265/268 79.9/84.1 80/90 81/85 269/272
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 90.8/97.1 100/100 90/96 276/282 94.6/100.9 100/110 95/100 280/286
18.6/24.8 51.7/59.7 113.6/123.6 125/125 111/120 295/303 117.4/127.4 125/150 116/125 299/307
24.0/32.0 66.7/77.0 132.4/145.3 150/150 128/140 310/320 136.2/149.1 150/150 133/145 314/324
31.8/42.4 88.4/102.0 159.5/176.5 175/200 153/169 420/447 163.3/180.3 175/200 158/173 424/451
--- --- 49.0 60 52 243 52.8 60 56 247
7.8/10.4 21.7/25.0 76.1/80.3 80/90 77/81 265/268 79.9/84.1 80/90 81/85 269/272
12.0/16.0 33.4/38.5 90.8/97.1 100/100 90/96 276/282 94.6/100.9 100/110 95/100 280/286
18.6/24.8 51.7/59.7 113.6/123.6 125/125 111/120 295/303 117.4/127.4 125/150 116/125 299/307
24.0/32.0 66.7/77.0 132.4/145.3 150/150 128/140 310/320 136.2/149.1 150/150 133/145 314/324
31.8/42.4 88.4/102.0 159.5/176.5 175/200 153/169 420/447 163.3/180.3 175/200 158/173 424/451
--- --- 21.4 25 23 102 23.2 30 25 104
13.9 16.7 42.2 45 42 119 44.0 45 44 121
16.5 19.8 46.1 50 45 122 47.9 50 47 124
27.8 33.4 63.1 70 61 135 64.9 70 63 137
33.0 39.7 71.0 80 68 142 72.8 80 70 144
41.7 50.2 84.1 90 80 202 85.9 90 82 204
--- --- 22.2 25 23 121 24.0 30 26 123
13.9 16.7 43.0 45 43 138 44.8 45 45 140
16.5 19.8 46.9 50 46 141 48.7 50 48 143
27.8 33.4 63.9 70 62 154 65.7 70 64 156
33.0 39.7 71.8 80 69 161 73.6 80 71 163
41.7 50.2 84.9 90 81 221 86.7 90 83 223
--- --- 22.2 25 23 121 24.0 30 26 123
13.9 16.7 43.0 45 43 138 44.8 45 45 140
16.5 19.8 46.9 50 46 141 48.7 50 48 143
27.8 33.4 63.9 70 62 154 65.7 70 64 156
33.0 39.7 71.8 80 69 161 73.6 80 71 163
41.7 50.2 84.9 90 81 221 86.7 90 83 223
--- --- 17.1 20 18 87 20.9 25 22 91
17.0 20.4 42.6 45 42 107 46.8 50 46 111
34.0 40.9 68.2 70 65 128 72.0 80 69 132
--- --- 17.5 20 19 102 21.3 25 23 106
17.0 20.4 43.0 45 42 122 46.8 50 46 126
34.0 40.9 68.6 70 66 143 72.4 80 70 147
--- --- 17.5 20 19 102 21.3 25 23 106
17.0 20.4 43.0 45 42 122 46.8 50 46 126
34.0 40.9 68.6 70 66 143 72.4 80 70 147
FLA
MCA MOCP
NO P.E. w/ P.E. (pwrd fr/unit)
DISC. SIZE
MCA MOCP
FLA LRA FLA LRA
DISC. SIZE
548J
NOTE: See page 96 for table legend and notes.
95
Legend and Notes for Table 50
LEGEND:
CO --- Convenient outlet DISC --- Disconnect FLA --- Full load amps IFM --- Indoor fan motor LRA --- Locked rotor amps MCA --- Minimum circuit amps MOCP --- Maximum over current protection P E --- P ow er e xh au st UNPWR CO - -- Unpowered convenient outlet NOTES:
1. In compliance with NEC requirements for multimotor and combination load equipment (refer to NEC Articles 430 and
440), the overcurrent protective device for the unit shall be fuse or HACR breaker. Canadian units may b e fuse or circuit breaker.
2. Unbalanced 3-Phase Supply Voltage Never operate a motor where a phase imbalance in supply voltage is greater than 2%. Use the following formula to de­termine the percentage of voltage imbalance.
548J
% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x
max voltage deviation from average voltage
Example: Supply voltage is 230-3-60
AB = 224 v BC = 231 v AC = 226 v
(224 + 231 + 226)
= 227
= 1.76%
average voltage
Average Voltage =
Determine maximum deviation from average voltage. (AB) 227 – 224 = 3 v (BC) 231 – 227 = 4 v (AC) 227 – 226 = 1 v Maximum deviation is 4 v. Determine percent of voltage imbalance.
% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x
This amount of phase imbalance is satisfactory as it is below the maximum allowable 2%.
IMPORTANT: If the supply voltage phase imbalance is more than 2%, contact your local electric utility company immediately.
APPENDIX V. WIRING DIAGRAM LIST
3
=
4
227
681
3
Wiring Diagrams
548J***A
SIZE VOLTAGE CONTROL POWER
208/230---1 ---60 48TM501434.02 48TM501435.02
04A
208/230---3 ---60 48TM501434.02 48TM501436.02
460---3 --- 60 48TM501434.02 48TM501436.02 575---3 --- 60 48TM501434.02 48TM501436.02
208/230---1 ---60 48TM501434.02 48TM501435.02
05A
208/230---3 ---60 48TM501434.02 48TM501436.02
460---3 --- 60 48TM501434.02 48TM501436.02 575---3 --- 60 48TM501434.02 48TM501436.02
208/230---1 ---60 48TM501434.02 48TM501435.02
06A
208/230---3 ---60 48TM501434.02 48TM501436.02
460---3 --- 60 48TM501434.02 48TM501436.02 575---3 --- 60 48TM501434.02 48TM501436.02
208/230---3 ---60 48TM501434.02 48TM501436.0
07A
460---3 --- 60 48TM501434.02 48TM501436.0 575---3 --- 60 48TM501434.02 48TM501436.0
All RTU ---MP* 48TM501531.03
548J***D
SIZE VOLTAGE CONTROL POWER
208/230---3 ---60 48TM501370.03 48TM501371.04
08D
460---3 --- 60 48TM501370.03 48TM501371.04 575---3 --- 60 48TM501370.03 48TM501371.04
208/230---3 ---60 48TM501370.03 48TM501371.04
09D
460---3 --- 60 48TM501370.03 48TM501371.04 575---3 --- 60 48TM501370.03 48TM501371.04
All RTU ---MP* 48TM501448.03
NOTE: Component arrangement on Control; Legend on Power Schematic * The RTU-- MP control label overlays a portion of the base unit control label. The base unit label drawing and the control option drawing are required to
provide a complete unit control diagram.
96
APPENDIX VI. MOTORMASTER SENSOR LOCATIONS
Sensor
Sensor Location
Location
548J
Fig. 81 -- 548J*04A Outdoor Circuiting
Sensor Location
C09191
C09193
Fig. 83 -- 548J*06A Outdoor Circuiting
Sensor Location
Fig. 82 -- 548J*05A Outdoor Circuiting
C09192
C09194
Fig. 84 -- 548J*07A Outdoor Circuiting
97
548J
APPENDIX VI. (cont) MOTORMASTER SENSOR LOCATIONS
Sensor Location
Fig. 85 -- 548J*08D/09D Outdoor Circuiting
C09195
E2009 Bryant Heating & Cooling Systems D 7310 W. Morris St. D Indianapolis, IN 46231 Printed in U.S.A. Edition Date: 06/09
Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.
98
Catalog No. SM548J---01
Replaces: NEW
START-UP CHECKLIST
(Remove and Store in Job File)
I. PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
MODEL NO.: SERIAL NO.:
DA TE: TECHNICIAN:
II. PRE-START-UP (insert checkmark in box as each item is completed)
j VERIFY THA T JOBSITE VOLT AGE AGREES WITH VOLT AGE LISTED ON RA TING PLATE
j VERIFY THA T ALL P ACKAGING MA TERIALS HA VE BEEN REMOVED FROM UNIT
j REMOVE ALL SHIPPING HOLD DOWN BOLTS AND BRACKETS PER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
j VERIFY THA T CONDENSA TE CONNECTION IS INSTALLED PER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
j CHECK REFRIGERANT PIPING FOR INDICA TIONS OF LEAKS; INVESTIGATE AND REP AIR IF NECESSARY
j CHECK ALL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AND TERMINALS FOR TIGHTNESS
j CHECK THA T RETURN (INDOOR) AIR FILTERS ARE CLEAN AND IN PLACE
j VERIF Y THAT UNIT INST ALLATION IS LEVEL
j CHECK FAN WHEELS AND PROPELLER FOR LOCATION IN HOUSING/ORIFICE AND SETSCREW
TIGHTNESS
j CHECK TO ENSURE THA T ELECTRICAL WIRING IS NOT IN CONTACT WITH REFRIGERANT LINES
OR SHARP METAL EDGES
j CHECK PULLEY ALIGNMENT AND BEL T TENSION PER INSTALLATION INSTR UCTIO NS
III. START-UP
548J
ELECTRICAL
SUPPLY VOLT AGE L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1
CIRCUIT 1 COMPRESSOR AMPS L1
CIRCUIT 2 COMPRESSOR AMPS L1
INDOOR-FAN AMPS
OUTDOOR-FAN AMPS NO. 1 NO. 2
TEMPERATURES
OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE DB WB
RETURN-AIR TEMPERATURE
COOLING SUPPLY AIR
PRESSURES (Cooling Mode)
REFRIGERANT SUCTION, CIRCUIT 1 PSIG F
REFRIGERANT SUCTION, CIRCUIT 2
REFRIGERANT DISCHARGE, CIRCUIT 1
REFRIGERANT DISCHARGE, CIRCUIT 2
DB WB
DB WB
PSIG F
PSIG F
PSIG F
L2 L3
L2 L3
j VERIFY THA T 3-PHASE FAN MOTOR AND BLOWER ARE ROTATING IN CORRECT DIRECTION.
j VERIFY THA T 3-PHASE SCROLL COMPRESSOR IS ROTATING IN THE CORRECT DIRECTION
j VERIFY REFRIGERANT CHARGE USING CHARGING CHARTS
GENERAL
j SET ECONOMIZER MINIMUM VENT AND CHANGEOVER SETTINGS TO MATCH JOB REQUIREMENTS
(IF EQUIPPED)
99
548J
E2009 Bryant Heating & Cooling Systems D 7310 W. Morris St. D Indianapolis, IN 46231 Printed in U.S.A. Edition Date: 06/09
Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.
100
Catalog No. SM548J---01
Replaces: NEW
Loading...